JP2017000778A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing a performance effect by a light transmissive member.SOLUTION: A projection unit 7600 is formed from a light transmissive material and is configured to include three projection plate members 7620 placed side by side in a longitudinal direction. In the projection plate members 7620, an irradiation unit 650 in that an irradiation surface is arranged toward a side end face of the projection plate members 7620 is arranged at the periphery and a reflection part 622 for reflecting light applied from the irradiation unit 650 to a front side is formed. By switching irradiation/non-irradiation of the three irradiation units 650 arranged in the respective projection plate members 7620, a design to be displayed and a position of a pattern can be changed. Thus, by changing distance between respective display surfaces, modes of a design and a pattern visually recognized by a player are changed, thus enhancing a performance effect.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 81

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a light transmissive member formed of a light transmissive material and having a reflective portion, and light emitting means disposed around the light transmissive member with the irradiation surface facing the reflective portion. A gaming machine is known in which light incident from the periphery of a light transmitting member is reflected by a plurality of reflecting portions and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member (Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-207880 A

  However, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that it is not possible to enhance the effect of the light transmitting member.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the effect of the light transmitting member.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is formed of a light-transmitting material and has a light-transmitting member having a reflecting portion, and an irradiation surface facing the reflecting portion around the light-transmitting member. A plurality of the light emitting means, and a plurality of the light emitting means are disposed in a state in which an irradiation surface is directed to each of the light reflecting members. A plurality of the light transmitting members are arranged side by side, and the light emitting means are disposed one or more at a time with the irradiation surface facing the side end surfaces of the plurality of light transmitting members, and light incident from the periphery of the light transmitting member Is reflected by the plurality of reflecting portions and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member, and the reflection position of the light reflected by the plurality of reflecting portions is changed to the front or back direction of the light transmitting member. Distance changing means is provided.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the light transmission member includes a plurality of divided bodies arranged in parallel in a front or back direction of the light transmission member, and the plurality of reflections. At least one part is formed in one of the divided bodies, and the light emitting means are arranged one by one with the irradiation surface facing the side end surface of the one divided body.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the plurality of reflecting portions are formed in at least three locations of the light transmitting member, and irradiation or non-irradiation of the plurality of light emitting means is performed. Is switched, the reflection position of the light reflected by the plurality of reflecting portions is changed in the front or back direction of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to enhance the effect of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the first aspect, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the patterns and symbols displayed on the divided body.

  According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the manufacturing cost can be reduced and the reliability of the product can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a rear view of a displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a left displacement member and a right displacement member. It is a back perspective view of a left displacement member and a right displacement member. It is a front perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a back perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a back perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a back perspective view of a displacement unit. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st mode. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st mode. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 1st mode. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 2nd mode. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of the displacement unit in the 3rd mode. It is a rear view of the displacement unit in the rear view of FIG. It is a front view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of a projection unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a projection unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a projection unit. It is a front view of a back base. It is a rear view of a front base and an irradiation unit. It is a rear view of a front base. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the front base and irradiation unit in the arrow XXXVI direction view of FIG. It is a front view of a projection board member, a gear member, and a groove formation member. FIG. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member taken along line XXXVIII-XXXVIII in FIG. 37. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit, and (b) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the projection unit taken along line XXXIXb-XXXIXb in FIG. 39 (a). (A) to (c) are partial enlarged sectional views of the projection unit. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove | channel formation member. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove | channel formation member. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove | channel formation member. (A) is a top view of an irradiation unit, (b) is a front view of the irradiation unit in the arrow XLIVb direction view of FIG. 44 (a). 44A is a rear view of the irradiation unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow XLVa in FIG. 44A, and FIG. 44B is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit along the XLVb-XLVb line in FIG. (A) is a front view of a 1st block, (b) is sectional drawing of the 1st block in the XLVIb-XLVIb line | wire of Fig.46 (a), (c) is a front view of a 2nd block. FIG. 46D is a sectional view of the second block taken along line XLVId-XLVId in FIG. It is a front view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a rear view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a front perspective view of a vertical displacement unit. It is a back perspective view of an up-and-down displacement unit. It is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in the 1st position. It is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in an intermediate position. It is a front view of the up-and-down displacement unit in the 2nd position. It is a rear view of the up-and-down displacement unit in the 1st position. It is a rear view of the up-and-down displacement unit in an intermediate position. It is a rear view of the up-and-down displacement unit in the 2nd position. (A) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member at the first position, (b) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member at the intermediate position, and (c) is a transmission at the second position. It is a rear view of a gear and a connection member. (A) to (c) is a rear view of the transmission gear and the connecting member in the first drive range. 54A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 54, FIG. 54B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. 55, and FIG. FIG. 57 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit along the line LIXc-LIXc in FIG. 56. (A) is a front view of the projection plate member, gear member, and groove formation member in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is the projection plate member, gear member, and groove | channel in the LXb-LXb line | wire of Fig.60 (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a forming member. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove forming member. (A) is a front view of the projection plate member, gear member, and groove formation member in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the projection plate member, gear member, and groove | channel in the LXIVb-LXIVb line | wire of Fig.64 (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a forming member. FIG. 64A is a side view of the projection plate member, the gear member, and the groove forming member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 64A, and FIG. 65B is a projection plate taken along line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. FIG. 66C is a cross-sectional view of the member, the gear member, and the groove forming member, and FIG. 65C is a cross-sectional view of the projection plate member, the gear member, and the groove forming member along the line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. (A) And (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of a projection plate member, a gear member, and a groove | channel formation member. (A) is a top view of the irradiation unit in 4th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of an irradiation unit. (A) is the partial expansion schematic diagram of the projection unit in the 1st block vicinity, (b) is the partial expansion schematic diagram of the projection unit in the 2nd block vicinity. It is a front view of the projection unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of a front base. It is a rear view of a projection unit. (A) is a front view of the projection unit in a 1st state, (b) is a front view of the projection unit in a 2nd state. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. (A) is a front view of the projection unit in a 1st state, (b) is a front view of the projection unit in a 3rd state. (A) is a rear view of the projection unit in the first state, and (b) is a rear view of the projection unit in the second state. It is a front view of the projection unit in 6th Embodiment. It is a front exploded perspective view of a projection unit. It is a rear view of the front base in the state where the front base and the irradiation unit are assembled. (A) to (c) is a rear view of the projection unit. (A) is a front view of the projection unit in 7th Embodiment, (b) is a perspective front view of a projection unit, (c) is the projection unit in the LXXXIc-LXXXIc line of FIG. 81 (a). FIG. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a projection unit. (A) to (d) are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of the projection unit partially expanded. (A) And (b) is a front view of the projection unit partially expanded. (A) is a front view of the projection unit in 8th Embodiment, (b) is a side view of a projection unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a projection unit. (A) to (c) is a side view of the projection unit. It is a disassembled perspective front view of the projection unit in 9th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of a projection unit, (b) is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the projection unit in the XCb-XCb line | wire of Fig.90 (a). (A) to (c) are top views of the projection unit. (A) And (c) is the schematic diagram which looked at the projection unit from the top, (b) And (d) is a front view of a projection unit. (A) is a front view of the projection unit in 10th Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the projection unit in the XCIIIb-XCIIIb line | wire of Fig.93 (a). It is a disassembled perspective front view of a projection unit. (A) to (d) are schematic views of a projection plate member. (A) And (b) is a front view of the projection unit in 11th Embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective front view of a projection unit. (A) is sectional drawing in the XCVIIIa-XCVIIIa line | wire of FIG.96 (b), (b) is sectional drawing in the XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb line | wire of FIG.96 (b). (A) to (c) are schematic views of the projection plate member and the irradiation unit as viewed from the front. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the projection unit as a modification. (A) is sectional drawing of the projection unit as a modification, (b) is a front view of the projection unit in the arrow CIb direction view of FIG. 101 (a). (A) is a perspective view of a projection plate member as a modification, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CIIb-CIIb in FIG. 102 (a).

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 59, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 1 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 1, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape 2 that is formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 2. And an inner frame 4 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 4, the outer frame 2 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two positions on the left and right of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 18 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 4 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 4 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 4 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 4, a front door 5 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front door 5 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two places on the left and right sides of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the front door is provided with the side on which the hinges 19 are provided as an opening / closing axis. 5 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 4 and the locking of the front door 5 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front door 5 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window portion 5c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses 8 is disposed on the back side of the front door 5, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front door 5, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and has an open upper surface, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front door 5 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front door (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the periphery of the window portion 5c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 1, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpots or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front door 5 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light-emitting means such as an LED is incorporated, and a display lamp 34 is provided that can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  Further, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front door 5 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right-side electric decoration part 32, and an adhering space K1 (see FIG. 2) can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 5c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 1, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill, rails 76 and 77, and a general prize. The opening 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, the variable winning device 65, the first through gate 66, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 4 (see FIG. 1). It is attached to the back side. The base plate 60 is made of wood on which thin plate materials are laminated, and is formed so that various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side cannot be seen by the player. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 4 through the window portion 5c (see FIG. 1) of the front door 5. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 77 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located at an inner position of the outer rail 77 in the same manner as the outer rail 77. The arc-shaped inner rail 76 formed in the above is planted. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 76 and the outer rail 77, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 76 and 77 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 76 and 77 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 76 (the upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 77 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  A first symbol display device 37A, 37B including a plurality of LEDs serving as light emitting means and a 7-segment display is disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 1 is in a certain change, in a short time, or in a normal state by a lighting state, or whether a pachinko machine 1 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 1 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 1, a lottery is performed when there is a winning at either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the big hit type if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) in the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning opening 140 It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a normal state, it is a game state in which neither the probability change nor the time is short (the state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability has been increased).

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time during which the first electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is longer than normal. Time is set. When the first electric combination 140a is in an opened state (open state), the first winning combination 140a is compared with a case where the first electric combination 140a is in a closed state (closed state). The ball is ready to win. Therefore, during the probability change or during the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, instead of changing the opening time of the first electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140, or in addition to changing the opening time, Thus, the number of times that the first electric accessory 140a is opened may be changed to be larger than normal. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the first electric accessory is not changed during the time when the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and once. It is also possible to change at least one of the number of times 140a is opened. In addition, during the time of probability change or in a short time, the first electric combination 140a and the second electric combination 82 are opened at the time when the first electric combination 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened or once. The number of hits may not be performed, and only the probability of hitting the second symbol may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 as a trigger (start winning). A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”) for displaying the symbols in a variable manner, and an LED for variably displaying the second symbols with the passage of the first through gate 66 as a trigger. The 2nd symbol display apparatus (not shown) comprised by these is provided.

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the first through gate 66, the second symbol display device alternately displays a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. The variable display to light is performed. In the pachinko machine 1, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the first through gate 66, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 1, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is It is configured to be activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chances for winning in the winning lottery increase, the player can be given many opportunities for the first electric combination 140a of the second winning opening 140 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time reduction.

  In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the second winning a prize opening during the probability change or in the short time may be achieved by other methods such as increasing the probability of winning during the probability change or shortening the time and increasing the opening time or the number of times the first electric accessory 140a is released per hit. When it is in a state where it is easy for the ball to win 140 and the third winning opening, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the first electric combination 140a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 66 is assembled to the game board in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80. The first through gate 66 is configured to allow passage of a part of the ball that flows down the game board out of the balls fired on the game board. When the ball passes through the first through gate 66, the lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passages of the first through gate 66 of the sphere is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and a second symbol hold lamp (not shown). ) Is also lit. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing the ball of the first through gate 66 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). . Further, the number of through gates to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be three or more. Further, the assembly position of the through gate is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 140 through which a ball can win is disposed below the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second winning port 140, a second winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 ( (See FIG. 4), the jackpot lottery is made, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 is also a winning port from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 140 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls that are paid out when a ball is awarded to the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls that are paid out when a ball is awarded to the second prize opening 140, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 140 may be five.

  The first winning combination 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. The first electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the first electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), so that the ball is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Yes. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the sphere to the first through gate 66, the first electric accessory 140a is The open state (enlarged state) is entered, and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 140.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the first electric accessory 140a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Furthermore, during the time when the probability is changing or when the time is short, the time during which the first electric accessory 140a is opened also becomes longer than during normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change or during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball is won at the first winning port 64 and when the ball is won at the second winning port 140. However, the probability that the 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have the first electric accessory 140a as in the second winning port 140, and the ball can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 140 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, resulting in a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during the probability change and the short time, passing the ball through the first through gate 66 makes it easy for the first electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 to be in an open state, so that the second winning opening 140 is won. Since it is in an easy state, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 140 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the first through gate 66. It is advantageous for the player to make the first electric accessory 140a open and aim to win 15R probability variation by winning the second winning opening 140.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 (whether it is being prone to change, shorting, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 1, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of either the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 140 becomes a jackpot, the jackpot is stopped after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to be a symbol, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality (for example, three) of two or more may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64. The left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

  In the lower right corner of the game board 13, there is provided an adhering space K1 for adhering a certificate paper, an identification label, etc., and the certificate paper or the like affixed to the adhering space K1 is a small window of the front door 5. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 82 are guided to the unillustrated ball discharge path through the first outlet 71. The The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 1.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main controller 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 1 such as jackpot lottery, setting of display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be held (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 1 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) at power-on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to hold (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a to have a launch strength according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when an instruction to launch a ball is issued by the main control device 110. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes drive motors 481, 491, 661, and 880.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 has a variation effect of the third symbol, etc. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 1, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, a schematic configuration of the operation unit 200 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation unit 200, and FIG. 6 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit 200. 7 and 8 are front views of the operation unit 200. FIG.

  In FIG. 7, the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R and the protruding member 485 of the displacement unit 400 and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are each displaced to the retracted position, and in FIG. The left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, the projecting member 485, and the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively displaced to the overhanging positions.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, the operation unit 200 includes a rear case 300 formed in a box shape, and a displacement unit 400, a projection unit 600, and a vertical displacement unit 800 are respectively disposed in the inner space of the rear case 300. Housed in order.

  The back case 300 includes a bottom wall 301 having a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and an outer wall 302 standing from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall 301 toward the front. It is formed in a box shape with one side (front side) open. The bottom wall 301 is formed with an opening 301a having a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back of the bottom wall 301 is visually recognized through the opening 301a. It is possible.

  The displacement unit 400 includes a front frame-shaped base member 410 disposed on the bottom wall portion 301 of the back case 300, a left displacement member 420L, a right displacement member 420R, and a base member 410 that are displaceably disposed on the base member 410. A projecting member 485, a retracted position for retracting the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the projecting member 485 to the rear side of the projection unit 600, and an opening 301a of the rear case 300 (that is, the third symbol display device). 81) and can be displaced between the overhanging positions projecting to the front side (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  In this case, the displacement unit 400 is provided with two drive means (a first drive motor 481 and a second drive motor 491) for driving the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485). By selecting the driving means to be driven, the displacement mode of the displacement member can be made different (a plurality of types of displacement modes are formed). Details of this structure will be described later.

  The projection unit 600 includes an annular base member 610 disposed in front of the displacement unit 400, a disk-shaped projection plate member 620 disposed on the inner peripheral side of the base member 610, and a projection. And a plurality of LEDs 651 that allow light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620. The projection plate member 620 is made of a light transmissive material, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player. When the light is incident from the LED 651, the incident light is changed into a pattern or The light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in a pattern-shaped manner. That is, a pattern or a pattern can be raised (displayed) on the front of the third symbol display device 81.

  In this case, the projection unit 600 employs a structure that increases the efficiency of incidence of the light emitted from the LED 651 on the projection plate member 620, and strengthens the light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 (pattern or pattern). Can appear clearly). In addition, a structure that improves workability when assembling a plurality of LEDs 651 (irradiation unit 650) to the base member 610 is employed. Details of these structures will be described later.

  The vertical displacement unit 800 includes a front base 820 and a rear base 830 disposed at the upper part of the base member 610 of the projection unit 600, and a displacement member 850 whose one end is rotatably supported by both the base members 820 and 830. The other end side of the displacement member 850 is displaced between a retracted position above the opening 301a of the back case 300 (that is, the third symbol display device 81) and an overhanging position protruding to the front side. Yes (see FIGS. 7 and 8).

  In this case, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes an urging spring SP that urges the displacement member 850, and the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elasticity of the urging spring SP at a predetermined position between the retracted position and the extended position. By balancing the recovery force, the displacement member 850 performs reciprocal displacement (approximately simple vibration) by the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP around the balance position (predetermined position). Structure is adopted. Details of this structure will be described later.

  Next, the displacement unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 10 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400.

  The displacement unit 400 includes a base member 410 that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 301 (see FIG. 6) of the back case 300, and a displacement member (left displacement member 420L and right displacement that is displaceably disposed on the base member 410). Member 420R) and a plurality of (two in this embodiment) drive means (lower drive mechanism 480 and upper drive mechanism 490) for applying a drive force to the displacement member, and as described above, the lower drive When the displacement member is displaced by driving the mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481), the displacement member is displaced by driving the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), or the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive). When the displacement member is displaced by driving both the motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491), the displacement member may be displaced in a different manner. It is formed so as to kill. Details of the structure will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  First, the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 is a front perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, and FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the displacement unit 400 includes a left displacement member 420L and a right displacement member 420R that are formed as displacement members that perform effects by displacement, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R include the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. The left driven member 430L and the right driven member 430R, the carriage member 440, the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R are connected.

  The left displacement member 420L is a long member disposed in a vertical posture, and includes a connecting shaft 421 protruding from the back surface, a connecting hole 422 drilled at the upper end, and a slide drilled at the lower end. A moving groove 423. The connection shaft 421 is a shaft having a circular cross section, and the connection hole 431 of the left driven member 430L is rotatably supported. That is, the upper end of the left driven member 430L is rotatably connected to the back side of the left displacement member 420L.

  The connecting shaft 421 is set to have a length dimension that protrudes from the back surface of the left driven member 430L, and the protruding tip of the connecting shaft 421 is a drive groove 494c (in the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490). 17 and 18) is slidably inserted. That is, when the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven (rotated), the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c acts on the connecting shaft 421, and the left displacement member 420L is displaced.

  The connecting hole 422 is a hole having a circular cross section, and one connecting shaft 441 of two connecting shafts 441 of a carriage member 440 described later is rotatably inserted. That is, the left displacement member 420L is connected in a state in which a relative change in position with respect to the cart member 440L (rotation with the axis of the connection hole 422 as the rotation center) is allowed.

  The sliding groove 423 is a groove extending along the longitudinal direction of the left displacement member 420L, and a driving pin 488b (see FIG. 15) of the lower left rack 488L described later is rotatably and slidably inserted therethrough. . Accordingly, in the state where the lower left rack 488L is stopped, only the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven or vice versa, the posture change (rotation) of the left displacement member 420L with respect to the base member 410 is reversed. Can be formed.

  The left driven member 430L is a member that is driven between the base member 410 and the left displacement member 420L to be driven by the displacement of the left displacement member 420L, and is a connection hole 431 that is drilled at one end (upper end). And a sliding pin 432 protruding from the back surface.

  The connection hole 431 is a hole having a circular cross section, and as described above, the connection shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is rotatably inserted. The sliding pin 432 is a pin (rod-like body) having a circular cross section, and is rotatably and slidably inserted into a sliding groove 410 a formed in the side of the base member 410. Therefore, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the left driven member 430L can be driven while changing the relative posture with respect to the left displacement member 420L.

  The carriage member 440 rolls on a driven surface that extends along the left-right direction (width direction) on the upper portion of the base member 410 (upper intermediate portion 410f and upper front portion 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18). And two connecting shafts 441 arranged in parallel, and four rolling wheels 442 that are rotatably supported at both ends of each of the connecting shafts 441. Therefore, the upper end of the left displacement member 420L is displaced along the left-right direction (width direction) via the cart member 440 as each rolling wheel 442 of the cart member 440 rolls on the driven surface. .

  The rolling surface of the base member 410 is formed as a substantially horizontal flat surface facing the upper side in the vertical direction, and the rolling wheels 442 of the carriage member 440 are placed on the rolling surface. That is, the left displacement member 420 is suspended and supported by the rolling surface of the base member 410 via the carriage member 440.

  The upper left rack 450L slides on a guide portion that extends along the left-right direction (width direction) on the upper portion of the base member 410 (upper intermediate portion 410f and upper front portion 410g, see FIGS. 17 and 18). It is a long plate-shaped member, and is engraved along the longitudinal direction in the two connecting holes 451 through which the two connecting shafts 441 of the carriage member 440 are rotatably inserted and the back surface of the upper left rack 450L. Rack gear 452.

  Here, the right displacement member 420R is formed in a substantially bilaterally symmetric shape with respect to the left displacement member 420L, the right driven member 430R is formed with respect to the left driven member 430L, and the upper right rack 450R is formed with respect to the upper left rack 450L. Since the configuration is substantially the same, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  However, the upper right rack 450R is provided with a rack gear 452 in front of it. In addition, the upper right rack 450R is arranged with the connecting hole 451 formed in a position offset from the front side, and is disposed at a different position in the front-rear direction from the upper left rack 450L. Therefore, the rack gear 452 of the upper left rack 450L and the rack gear 452 of the upper right rack 450R are opposed to each other with a predetermined interval. In this case, a pinion gear 459 that is rotatably supported by the base member 410 is engaged with both rack gears 452.

  Accordingly, in accordance with the displacement of the left displacement member 420L, the upper left rack 450L is displaced (slid) in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 19) along the guide portion (not shown) of the base member 410. Then, the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

  In the present embodiment, since the number of pinion gears 459 provided between the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R is an odd number (that is, one), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R The displacement direction can be the reverse direction (the direction in which they are close to each other or away from each other). However, the number of pinion gears 459 arranged may be an even number, and the displacement directions of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R may be the same direction.

  Next, the lower drive mechanism 480 among the plurality of drive means (the lower drive mechanism 480 and the upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  13 and 15 are front perspective views of the displacement unit 400, and FIGS. 14 and 16 are rear perspective views of the displacement unit 400. 13 and 14 show a state where the back cover 412 is attached, and FIGS. 15 and 16 show a state where the back cover 412 is removed. In addition, in FIG. 13 to FIG. 16, the illustration of the raising cover 413 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 to 16, the lower drive mechanism 480 includes a first drive motor 481, a pinion gear 482 attached to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481, and a drive in which the pinion gear 482 is engaged. A gear 483, a drive arm 484 that forms a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 483, a projecting member 485 driven by the drive arm 484, a rack gear 486 disposed on the back surface of the projecting member 485, and a rack gear 486 And a lower left rack 488L and a lower right rack 488R that are meshed with the last gear 487e of the gear train.

  The first drive motor 481 is attached to the front of the left front cover 411L, and a pinion gear 482 is attached (fixed) to the drive shaft of the first drive motor 481 protruding from the back of the left front cover 411L. The The drive gear 483 is rotatably supported on the back surface of the left front cover 411L, and the drive arm 484 is rotatably supported on the front surface of the base member 410.

  The drive gear 483 is provided with an eccentric pin 483a which is located eccentric from the center of rotation and protrudes from the back surface. The drive arm 484 includes a shaft support hole 484a through which the support shaft of the base member 410 is rotatably inserted, a linear slide groove 484b through which the eccentric pin 483a of the drive gear 483 is slidably inserted, and shafts thereof. And a drive pin 484c that protrudes from the front at the end opposite to the side where the support hole 484a and the sliding groove 484b are formed.

  Therefore, when the driving gear 483 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction via the pinion gear 482 by the driving force of the first driving motor 481, the eccentric pin 483a of the driving gear 483 moves to the sliding groove 484b of the driving arm 484. When one or the other inner wall surface is acted on, the drive arm 484 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction around the shaft support hole 484a, and the drive pin 484c of the drive arm 484 is raised or lowered.

  The protruding member 485 includes a linear sliding groove 485a into which the driving pin 484c of the driving arm 484 is slidably inserted, and is disposed on the front surface of the base member 410 via the slide rail SL. The slide rail SL is an extendable linear guide mechanism, and is arranged in a vertical posture with its extension / contraction direction along the vertical direction. The slide rail SL is a base end rail disposed on the front surface of the base member 410, a front end rail disposed on the back surface of the protruding member 485, and a base rail interposed between the base end rail and the front end rail. And an intermediate rail that allows the end rail and the end rail to be displaced relative to each other in the longitudinal direction.

  Therefore, when the driving arm 484 is rotated and the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the protruding member 485 is pushed up or pushed down by the driving pin 484c of the driving arm 484, the slide rail SL is expanded and contracted, and the protruding member 485 is used as the base. The member 410 is moved up and down in the vertical direction.

  The rack gear 486 is engraved along the ascending / descending direction of the protruding member 485, and the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) has the front gear 487a engaged with the rack gear 486 and the front and right front sides of the base member 410. Each is rotatably supported between the back surface of the cover 411R. Therefore, by raising and lowering the protruding member 485, the gear train (the gears 487a to 487e) can be rotated using the linear motion of the rack gear 486.

  The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are long plate-like members, a rack gear 488a engraved on the side surface along the longitudinal direction, and a drive pin 488b projecting from the front at the end in the longitudinal direction. Are provided. The lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R have different positions in the vertical direction, and with the rack gears 488a facing each other, between the back surface of the base member 410 and the front surface of the back cover 412 (in the width direction). 19 in the left-right direction).

  The gear 487e at the end of the gear train is coaxially fixed to the adjacent gear 487d and protrudes to the back side through the opening 410b drilled in the base member 410, so that the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack It meshes with each rack gear 488a of the rack 488R. Therefore, as described above, when the gear train (gears 487a to 487e) is rotated as the protruding member 485 is moved up and down, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are mutually connected by the rotation of the last gear 487a. It can be linearly moved in the opposite directions (directions close to each other or away from each other).

  The drive pin 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R protrudes to the front side through a linear insertion groove 410c formed in the base member 410, and as described above, the left displacement member 420L. And it is rotatably inserted in the sliding groove 423 of the right displacement member 420R. Thus, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are linearly moved, so that the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced.

  In addition, the extending direction of the insertion groove 410c is formed substantially parallel to the driven surface on which the rolling wheel 442 of the carriage member 440 rolls. That is, the direction of linear motion of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R is substantially parallel to the direction of linear motion of the upper left rack 450L and the upper right rack 450R described later.

  Next, the upper drive mechanism 490 among the plurality of drive means (the lower drive mechanism 480 and the upper drive mechanism 490) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 17 is a front perspective view of the displacement unit 400, and FIG. 18 is a rear perspective view of the displacement unit 400. In FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, for easy understanding, the pinion gear 459 and the upper right rack 450R are illustrated between the upper intermediate portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the upper drive mechanism 490 includes a second drive motor 491, a pinion gear 492 attached to the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491, and a drive in which the pinion gear 492 is engaged. It mainly includes a gear 493 and a drive arm 494 that forms a crank mechanism together with the drive gear 493.

  The base member 410 has an upper portion (an upper side portion formed in a substantially frame shape when viewed from the front) formed as a divided structure in which an upper back portion 410e, an upper intermediate portion 410f, and a front portion 410g are sequentially stacked on the front side. Is done.

  The second drive motor 491 is attached to the front surface of the portion projecting upward from the upper intermediate portion 410f, and the drive shaft of the second drive motor 491 projecting from the rear surface of the projecting portion has a pinion gear. 492 is attached (fixed). The drive gear 493 and the drive arm 494 are rotatably supported on the back surface of the upper middle portion 410f.

  The drive gear 493 includes an eccentric pin 493a that is eccentric from the center of rotation and protrudes from the back surface. The drive arm 494 includes a shaft support hole 494a through which the support shaft of the upper intermediate portion 410f is rotatably inserted, a linear slide groove 494b through which the eccentric pin 493a of the drive gear 493 is slidably inserted, and these And a linear drive groove 494c located at the end opposite to the side where the shaft support hole 494a and the sliding groove 494b are formed.

  Therefore, when the driving gear 493 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction via the pinion gear 492 by the driving force of the second driving motor 491, the eccentric pin 493a of the driving gear 493 moves to the sliding groove 494b of the driving arm 494. When one or the other inner wall surface receives the action, the drive arm 494 is rotated in the forward direction or the reverse direction around the shaft support hole 494a, and the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is displaced to the left or right.

  As described above, the distal end of the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is slidably inserted into the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494. Therefore, by driving the drive arm 494 (rotating about the shaft support hole 494a) and causing the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c displaced left and right to act on the connecting shaft 421, the cart member 440 (rolling wheel 442) is covered. The upper end side of the left displacement member 420L can be displaced left and right by rolling along the rolling surface.

  In this case, when the left displacement member 420L is displaced left and right and the carriage member 440 (rolling wheel 442) rolls on the driven surface, the upper left rack 450L serves as the guide portion of the base member 410 as described above. Is displaced (slided) in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 19), and the displacement of the upper left rack 450L is transmitted to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459. 420R can be displaced. The rolling surface on which the rolling wheel 442 of the carriage member 440 rolls is formed in the upper middle portion 410f and the upper front portion 410g.

  Next, the operation of the displacement unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS.

  First, both the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are driven to move the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485). A first mode of displacement will be described with reference to FIGS.

  19, 21 and 23 are front views of the displacement unit 400 in the first mode, and FIGS. 20, 22 and 24 are views of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIGS. 19, 21 and 23, respectively. It is a rear view.

  19 and 20 correspond to the state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485 are disposed at the retracted position, and FIGS. 23 and 24 illustrate the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. This corresponds to the state in which the protruding member 485 is disposed at the protruding position in the first mode.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, in the state of being disposed at the retracted position, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are disposed at the outermost positions (positions that are most separated from each other in the left-right direction), and The protruding member 485 is disposed at the lowermost position.

  When the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven from this state, respectively, after the state shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, the state shown in FIGS. The left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced in the direction close to each other in the left-right direction (width direction) and the protruding member 485 is raised up to the state (the protruding position in the first mode). It should be noted that the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485 are in a combined state (a state in which the three side surfaces are in close contact) at the extended position in the first mode.

  Specifically, when the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from the state of FIG. 19, the drive arm 484 is rotated, and the drive pin 484 c of the drive arm 484 is moved to the sliding groove 485 a of the protruding member 485. The protrusion member 485 is raised by pushing up the inner wall surface (see FIGS. 13 and 14).

  When the protruding member 485 is raised, the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are displaced (linearly moved) via the rack gear 486, the gear train (gears 487a to 487e), and the rack gear 488a (see FIGS. 15 and 15). 16), the drive pin 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R acts on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R, so that the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement The lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the member 420R is displaced (linearly moved) along the insertion groove 410c of the base member 410 in a direction approaching each other.

  On the other hand, when the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state of FIG. 19, the drive arm 494 is rotated, and the inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494 is the connecting shaft of the left displacement member 420L. 421 is affected. As a result, the carriage member 440 rolls on the driven surface, and the upper end side (the carriage member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linearly moved) in the direction approaching the right displacement member 420R (FIG. 17 and FIG. 17). 18).

  Further, when the upper end side (cart member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the right displacement member 420R The upper end side (cart member 440) is displaced (linearly moved) in a direction approaching the left displacement member 420L (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

  In the present embodiment, the displacement amount in the left-right direction (width direction, left-right direction in FIG. 20) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is such that the lower end displacement amount is smaller than the upper end displacement amount ( In other words, the movable range of the drive pin 488b (the extended length of the insertion groove 410c) is shorter than the movable range of the carriage member 440 (the extended length of the driven surface).

  In this case, the lower end side and the upper end side of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R start displacement substantially simultaneously from the retracted position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), and the overhanging position ( The lower drive mechanism 480 and the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven so as to reach substantially the same time (see FIGS. 23 and 24). That is, the displacement speed in the left-right direction on the upper end side (cart member 440) is made faster than the lower end side (drive pin 488b).

  Accordingly, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced in the left-right direction while rotating their postures, instead of being displaced in parallel in the left-right direction without rotating while maintaining the vertical posture. That is, it is impossible to displace the posture while rotating it in this way in a configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove with the driving force of one driving means. This is the first time that the drive means can be used.

  Further, when the displacement speed in the left-right direction on the upper end side (cart member 440) is different from the lower end side (drive pin 488b), the distance between the drive pin 488b and the cart member 440 is changed. Since the moving groove 423 has a long hole shape extending in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b, a change in the distance between the two can be absorbed. That is, it is not necessary to provide a complicated mechanism, and the sliding groove 423 and the driving pin 488b may be formed to be rotatable and slidable. Therefore, in addition to reducing the product cost, the reliability and durability of the operation are achieved. be able to.

  When the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 and the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 are driven in the directions opposite to those described above from the state shown in FIGS. The left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced away from each other in the left-right direction (width direction) up to the state (retracted position) shown in FIGS. Is lowered.

  Next, only the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is driven (that is, the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is maintained in the non-driven state), and the displacement member (the left displacement member 420L, A second mode for displacing the right displacement member 420R and the protruding member 485) will be described with reference to FIGS. In the description of the second aspect, FIGS. 19 and 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

  FIG. 25 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the second mode, and FIG. 26 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIG. 25 and 26 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485 are arranged at the protruding position in the second mode.

  Here, in the state shown in FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 (the state where it is disposed at the retracted position), the left displacement member 420L of the drive arm 494 of the upper drive mechanism 490 rotates on its upper end side (the axis of the connecting hole 422). It is arranged in a posture that allows rotation as a center. That is, the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L is allowed to slide along the drive groove 494c of the drive arm 494.

  Therefore, when only the first drive motor 481 of the lower drive mechanism 480 is driven from this state (the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20), as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the drive pins of the figure drive arm 484 are driven. When 484c pushes up the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 485a of the projecting member 485, the projecting member 485 is raised, and the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are moved to the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member. By acting on the inner wall surface of the sliding groove 423 of 420R, the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is displaced (linear motion) in a direction close to each other. That is, in the second mode, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated with the upper end side (the axis of the coupling hole 422) as the center of rotation.

  Next, only the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) is driven (that is, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) is maintained in the non-driven state), and the displacement member (the left displacement member 420L and A third mode for displacing the right displacement member 420R) will be described with reference to FIGS. In the description of the third aspect, FIGS. 19 and 20 are also referred to as appropriate.

  FIG. 27 is a front view of the displacement unit 400 in the third mode, and FIG. 28 is a rear view of the displacement unit 400 in the rear view of FIG. 27 and 28 correspond to a state in which the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are arranged at the overhang position in the third mode.

  Here, the sliding groove 423 of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R has an elongated hole shape extending in the vertical direction with a length larger than the diameter of the drive pin 488b, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member The member 420R is allowed to be lifted upward.

  Accordingly, when only the second drive motor 491 of the upper drive mechanism 490 is driven from the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 (the state where it is disposed at the retracted position), as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the drive arm The inner wall surface of the drive groove 494c of 494 is applied to the connecting shaft 421 of the left displacement member 420L, and the upper end side (the carriage member 440) of the left displacement member 420L is displaced (linearly moved) in the direction approaching the right displacement member 420R. In both cases, the displacement is transmitted from the upper left rack 450L to the upper right rack 450R via the pinion gear 459, so that the upper end side (the carriage member 440) of the right displacement member 420R is displaced in the direction approaching the left displacement member 420L. (Linear motion).

  That is, in the third aspect, the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be rotated with the lower end side (sliding groove 423 side) as the center of rotation. In the third mode, only the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced, and the protruding member 485 can be maintained in a stopped state.

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, guide means (for example, a guide groove) is extended on the base member 410, and the displacement member is formed so as to be able to be displaced (guided) along the guide means. The displacement mode of the member (the trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one. Therefore, the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member becomes one pattern, and it is difficult to produce an effect that gives the player's intention. Even if the driving force (driving speed) of the driving means (for example, the driving motor) is changed in magnitude, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases and decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) remains constant. For this reason, it is difficult to produce an effect that expresses the player's intention.

  On the other hand, according to the displacement unit 400 of the present embodiment, the lower drive mechanism 480 (first drive motor 481) and the upper drive mechanism 490 (second drive motor 491) are provided, and the drive state is selected (changed). Thus, the displacement member (the left displacement member 420L, the right displacement member 420R, and the protruding member 485) can be displaced in three types of modes (first mode, second mode, and third mode). That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member is limited to one, the production is not a single pattern, and the displacement member can be displaced in at least three different displacement modes. Thus, it is possible to produce an effect that makes a player's intention.

  In particular, in the first mode (see FIGS. 19 to 24), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can cause the displacement (linear motion) to be dominant, while the second mode. In the third mode (see FIGS. 19, 25 to 28), the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R can be displaced only by rotation (rotational motion), and the displacement motion forms are different. Can be made. As a result, the change of the displacement mode of the displacement member can be increased, and an effect that makes the player's intention can be easily performed.

  In this case, in the conventional product, there are those that change the displacement mode by changing only the rotation direction while the rotation center remains constant, but the second mode and the third mode in the present embodiment are The rotation center is not the only difference in the rotation direction but the rotation direction is different and the rotation center is also different (in the second aspect, the upper end side is the rotation center, and the third aspect Then, the lower end side is set as the rotation center), and the change of the displacement mode of the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) can be increased, and the effect of giving the player's intention can be easily performed.

  In the first mode, the displacement members (the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R) are displaced in a form that combines rotation and parallel movement (linear motion), and the direction of the rotation is the third mode. The direction of rotation is the same as the direction of rotation. Therefore, at the initial stage of the first aspect and the third aspect (see, for example, FIGS. 21 and 27), the player can visually recognize the displacement members so as to be displaced toward each other. Can be difficult. On the other hand, in the first mode, the protruding member 485 is raised in accordance with the displacement of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R in the approaching direction, whereas in the third mode, the protruding member 485 is stopped. Can be maintained in a state. That is, when the protruding member 485 is raised at the initial stage when the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are displaced toward each other, the displacement member is displaced to the overhang position in the first mode. Can make the player expect that.

  In the displacement unit 400, the carriage member 440, the lower left rack 488L, and the lower right rack 488R are respectively disposed (held) on the base member 410 so as to be linearly displaceable, and the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R are disposed on the carriage member 440. And the drive pins 488b of the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R are connected to the lower ends (sliding grooves 423) of the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R. It is inserted so as to be rotatable and slidable.

  Thereby, as described above, the structure for causing the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R to perform a linear motion including the rotational component (first aspect) and a rotational motion (second and third aspects). Can be simplified. For example, it is conceivable to provide a curved guide groove and to displace the displacement member along the guide groove. However, in the case of sliding displacement along such a curved locus, a complicated structure is required ( That is, when the locus is curved, not only the mechanism for guiding the member corresponding to the carriage member 440, the member corresponding to the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R in a curved shape, but also each of these members 440, It is necessary to provide a mechanism that can continuously apply a driving force to 488L and 488R).

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the carriage member 440, the lower left rack 488L, and the lower right rack 488R may be guided in the linear direction, and therefore the carriage member 440 may be guided by the driven surface as a flat surface. Since the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack 488R can use a rack and pinion mechanism, their structures can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve durability and operation reliability.

  Further, according to the displacement unit 400, the mechanism for guiding the left displacement member 420L and the right displacement member 420R is common in any of the first aspect, the second aspect, and the third aspect. One end side (upper end side) of each of the displacement members 420L and 420R is guided by the carriage member 440 rolling on the driven surface, and the other end side (lower end side) thereof is the lower left rack 488L and the lower right rack. The 488R is guided by sliding (linear movement) between the base member 410 and the back cover 412. That is, it is not necessary to provide different guide mechanisms according to the respective modes, and therefore it is not necessary to adopt a structure for switching between different guide mechanisms. As a result, the structure can be simplified, the reliability and durability of the operation can be improved, and the product cost can be reduced.

  Next, the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 46.

  First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 32. FIG. 29 is a front view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 30 is a rear view of the projection unit 600. FIG. 31 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 32 is an exploded rear perspective view of the projection unit 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 to 32, the projection unit 600 includes an annular base member 610 in front view, a disk-shaped projection plate member 620 rotatably disposed on the base member 610, and a projection thereof. A plurality of irradiation units 650 arranged to surround the outer peripheral side of the plate member 620, a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661 are transmitted to the projection plate member 620. And a gear train (gears 662 to 664).

  The base member 610 includes an annular rear surface base 611 and an annular front surface base 612 disposed in front of the rear surface base 611, and is formed between the opposing surfaces of the rear surface base 611 and the front base 612. The projection plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) are accommodated in the internal space.

  It should be noted that the projection plate member 620 is visible to the player in an area inside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612 in front view (hereinafter referred to as “display area”), and is an area outside the inner peripheral edge of the front base 612. In the (ie, the area shielded by the front base 612) (hereinafter referred to as “outside the display area”), the projection plate member 620 is not visible to the player.

  The projection plate member 620 is made of a light transmissive material, allows the player to visually recognize the display of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back side, and is irradiated from the irradiation unit 650. When the incident light is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620 in a form that forms a pattern or a pattern, and is visually recognized by the player. That is, a pattern or a pattern can be raised (displayed) on the front of the third symbol display device 81.

  A gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 are disposed on the rear side and the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the projection plate member 620, respectively. The gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and are disposed concentrically with the projection plate member 620.

  A plurality of teeth are formed on the gear member 630 along the outer peripheral surface, and the gear 664 at the end of the gear train is engaged. The groove forming member 640 is a member for forming a guide groove 641 having a U-shaped cross section continuous with the projection plate member 620 in the circumferential direction, and a plurality of collars rotatably supported by the base member 610. The projection plate member 620 is rotatably held by the base member 610 by C being guided by the guide groove 641. The detailed configuration of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 will be described later.

  The irradiation unit 650 is a unit including a plurality of light emitting means (LEDs 651) for causing light to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and each LED 651 faces the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 (opposes the outer peripheral surface). A plurality (5 in this embodiment) are arranged in the posture. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the extension line in the irradiation direction of each LED 651 is set to pass through the approximate center of the projection plate member 620. In addition, the detail of the attachment structure to the base member 610 of the irradiation unit 650 is mentioned later.

  The drive motor 661 is disposed on the back side of the back base 611, and the leading gear 662 of the gear train is connected (fixed) to the drive shaft of the drive motor 661. The gear member 630 disposed on the projection plate member 620 is engaged with the gear 664 at the end of the gear train. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 661 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (gear 662 to gear 664), and the projection plate member 620 is rotated.

  Next, a holding structure for the projection plate member 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 33 is a front view of the back base 611. 34 is a rear view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 35 is a rear view of the front base 612.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the back surface base 611 includes an inner standing portion 611a standing on the inner edge portion of the annular plate member, 611a, and an outer standing portion standing on the outer edge portion of the annular plate member. An installation portion 611c, an intermediate standing portion 611b standing between the inner standing portion 611a and the outer standing portion 611c, and an inner concave groove in a region surrounded by the inner standing portion 611b and the inner standing portion 611a 611d, an outer recessed portion 611e in a region surrounded by the inner standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 611c, and a regulation protrusion 611f that protrudes from an annular plate member with a predetermined interval therebetween. It is formed.

  The inner standing portion 611a is erected from the inner edge of the annular plate member to the front side (front side in FIG. 33) and has a certain thickness in the radial direction.

  The outer standing portion 611c is erected from the outer edge portion of the annular plate member to the front side (the front side in FIG. 33) and has a certain thickness in the radial direction.

  The intermediate standing part 611b is erected at an intermediate position between the inner standing part 611a and the outer standing part 611b. Further, the intermediate standing portion 611b is divided into seven around the axis, and each divided end portion is connected to the outer standing portion 611c.

  The inner concave groove 611d is an area for arranging an outer edge portion of the projection plate member 620, which will be described later, and surrounds the three directions of the annular plate member, the inner standing portion 611a, and the intermediate standing portion 611b. Formed.

  The outer concave groove 611e is an area for arranging an irradiation unit 650, which will be described later, and is formed so as to surround three directions of an annular plate member, an outer standing portion 611c, and an intermediate standing portion 611b. The

  The restriction protrusion 611f is a protrusion that prevents the collar C pivotally supported by the front base 612 from rattling on the back side, and is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter larger than the inner diameter of the hole opened in the axis of the collar C. At the same time, it is formed to project from the front side. In this embodiment, six restricting protrusions 611f are formed at predetermined intervals.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, on the back surface of the front base 612, an inner standing portion 611a, an intermediate standing portion 611b, an outer standing portion 611c, and a regulation projection 611f of the rear base 611 are provided. An installation portion 612a, an intermediate standing portion 612b, an outer standing portion 612c, and a shaft portion 612f are erected. That is, in the assembled state of the base member 610, the standing tip surfaces of the standing portions 612a to 612c of the front base 612 are superimposed on the standing tip surfaces of the standing portions 611a to 611c of the back base 611, respectively. At the same time, the tip of the shaft portion 612f is inserted into the restricting protrusion 611f.

  A plurality of holding pins 612g are erected on the back surface of the front base 612 and in a region between the intermediate erected portion 611b and the outer erected portion 612c. The holding pins 612g have an axial state with a circular cross section for positioning and holding the irradiation unit 650, and are arranged at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction.

  As described above, the irradiation unit 650 includes a plurality of LEDs 651 and is a unit for causing light emitted from each of the LEDs 651 to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and extends along the periphery of the projection plate member 620. Arranged. That is, the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 is surrounded by the plurality of irradiation units 650.

  The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the rear surface of the front base 612 and between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c, and the front surface of the rear base 611 is overlapped with the rear surface of the front base 612. By this, it is accommodated between the opposing surfaces (internal space) of these both bases 611,612.

  36 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the front base 612 and the irradiation unit 650 when viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVI in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 36, a substantially semicircular cutout portion 612b1 is formed in the middle standing portion 612b of the front base 612 by a notch at the leading end side. Similarly, a substantially semi-circular cutout 611b1 is cut out at a position in the same phase as the cutout 612b1 on the standing front end side of the intermediate standing portion 611b of the back base 611 (FIG. 33). reference).

  That is, in the state where the standing front end surfaces of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b are overlapped (that is, the assembled state of the base member 610), a substantially circular opening in front view is formed by the notch portions 611b1 and 612b2. The These circular openings are respectively formed at positions facing the respective LEDs 651 of the irradiation unit 650 (positions having the same phase).

  Therefore, the light emitted from each LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 passes through the circular opening formed by the cutout portions 611b1 and 612b1 of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b and enters the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. Is done. The circular opening is set to a diameter larger than the diameter of the light emitting portion of the LED 651.

  Next, the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 37 is a front view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. 38 is a partial cross-sectional view of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 along the line XXXVIII-XXXVIII in FIG. In FIG. 38, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a plate-like body having a circular shape when viewed from the front. The projection plate member 620 includes a cutout portion 621 and a reflection portion 622 that diffusely reflects light at a part of the outer edge.

  The notch 621 is a part for facilitating the arrangement of the collar C on the restricting protrusion 611f of the back base 611, and is formed by cutting out a part of the outer edge of the projection plate member 620 in a straight line direction perpendicular to the radial direction. Is done.

  The reflection portion 622 is a portion in which the inside of the projection plate member 620 is roughened by laser processing or the like, and is processed into a shape such as a pattern or a pattern over the entire area of the projection plate member 620 when viewed from the front. As a result, when the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 620 is irradiated on the reflecting portion 622, it is diffusely reflected by the rough surface of the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the surface side of the game board.

  As a result, the player can easily visually recognize the irregularly reflected light, and can visually recognize the shape of the reflecting portion 622. That is, when light is incident on the projection plate member 620, the shape of the reflection portion 622 can be displayed on the front side of the projection plate member 620.

  The gear member 630 is made of a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 620, is formed from a plate-like body having an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has an outer diameter dimension larger than that of the projection plate member 620. It is set large and is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612). The gear member 630 is disposed on the back side of the projection plate member 620 (the back side in FIG. 37), and its axis is disposed coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

  The gear member 630 is inclined from the toothed portion 631 engraved along the outer peripheral surface, the rear surface portion 632 on the side surface on the rear surface side, and the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) end of the rear surface portion 632 to the front side. An inclined surface portion 633 to be provided.

  The tooth portion 631 is a tooth surface to which the gear 664 is engaged as described above, and is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the gear member 630 over the entire periphery.

  The inclined surface portion 633 is a surface that is connected to the end portion 634 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the back surface portion 632 and is inclined to the front side. In addition, the inclination angle of the inclined surface portion 633 to the front side is the virtual angle B1 between the imaginary line B connecting the light source A and the end portion 634 of the LED 651 and the back surface portion 632, and the virtual angle obtained by extending the back surface portion 632 to the inner peripheral side. The intersection angle θ2 of the line C and the inclined surface portion 633 is set substantially the same (θ1 = θ2).

  The groove forming member 640 is made of a light transmissive material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 620. The groove forming member 640 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a shape bent in a substantially L shape. Arranged on the projection plate member 620 side. The groove forming member 640 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612). Further, the groove forming member 640 is arranged on the front side (the upper side in FIG. 38) of the projection plate member 620, and its axis is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620.

  The groove forming member 640 includes a side surface portion 641a of one surface of the inner portion bent into a substantially L-shaped cross section, a contact surface 641b of the other surface of the inner portion bent into a substantially L-shaped cross section, and a side surface portion on the front side. A front portion 642 and an inclined surface portion 643 inclined from the end on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the front portion 642 to the back side.

  The side surface portion 641a is a surface that sandwiches the collar C between facing the front surface (upper side in FIG. 38) of the projection plate member 620, and has a constant facing interval around the axis and the plane on the front surface side of the projection plate member 620. It is formed apart.

  The abutting surface 641b is a surface that abuts against the collar C disposed between the side surface portion 641a and the projection plate member 620 so as to rotatably hold the projection plate member 620, and has a cross section orthogonal to the side surface portion 641a. In addition, a circle is formed around the axis.

  Therefore, the side surface portion 641 a and the contact surface 641 b can be formed on the projection plate member 620 to form a guide groove 641 for guiding the collar C. That is, the guide groove 641 is formed between the projection plate member 620 and the groove formation member 640 by assembling the projection plate member 620 and the groove formation member 640.

  The inclined surface portion 643 is a surface inclined from the end portion 644 on the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 38) of the front surface portion 642 and inclined toward the back surface side. Further, the inclination angle of the inclined surface portion 643 toward the back surface is determined by the intersection angle θ3 between the imaginary line D connecting the light source A and the end portion 644 of the LED 651 and the front surface portion 642, and a virtual angle obtained by extending the front surface portion 642 to the inner peripheral side. The intersection angle θ4 of the line E and the inclined surface portion 643 is set substantially the same (θ3 = θ4).

  Next, the projection plate member 620 and the collar C will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39A is a rear view of the projection unit 600, and FIG. 39B is a partially enlarged sectional view of the projection unit 600 taken along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb of FIG. 39A. 40A to 40C are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the projection unit 600. FIG. 40A to 40C show a transition state when the collar C is attached to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612. 39 and 40 show a state in which the rear base 611 is removed from the projection unit 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 39A and 39B, in a state where the collar C is disposed on the shaft portion 612f, the protruding portion C1 protruding outward in the radial direction is the front side of the projection plate member 620 (FIG. 39 (b) (lower side) and the side surface 641a of the groove forming member 640 are arranged between the opposing sides (guide groove 641).

  Further, the distance dimension L1 between the front end surface of the protrusion C1 of the collar C and the side surface portion 641a of the groove forming member 640 is greater than the distance dimension L2 between the shaft portion of the collar C and the outer peripheral surface of the groove forming member 640. Is also set small (L1 <L2).

  Therefore, in order to allow the projection plate member 620 to rotate, when the groove forming member 640 and the collar C are arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is provided, the projection plate member 620 corresponds to the gap in the vertical and horizontal directions. Even if it deviates, the contact surface 641b of the groove forming member 640 can be brought into contact with the tip of the protruding portion C1 of the collar C. As a result, the projection plate member 620 can be rotatably held at the tip of the projection C1 of the collar C, and the projection plate member 620 can be smoothly rotated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40C from FIG. 40A, attachment of the collar C to the shaft portion 612f of the front base 612 will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 39A and 40A, when the collar C is disposed on the shaft portion 612f, the projection plate member 620 is disposed on the front base 612.

  Here, the projection plate member 620 is arranged on the front base 612 by arranging the groove forming member 640 inside the inner concave groove 612d of the front base 612. That is, the radial distance dimension of the inner concave groove 612d is formed to be larger than the radial distance dimension of the groove forming member 640, and the projection plate is formed by disposing the groove forming member 640 inside the inner concave groove 612d. The member 620 can be positioned and arranged.

  Next, the projection plate member 620 is rotated to displace the notch portion 621 of the projection plate member 620 toward the shaft portion 612f where the collar C is disposed. That is, by aligning the position of the notch portion 621 with the shaft portion 612f, the color C can be disposed on the front base 612 in which the projection plate member 620 is disposed.

  Next, the arrangement of the collar C on the shaft portion 612f is such that the shaft of the collar C is on the back side (upper side in FIG. 40 (a)) and the inner peripheral side (left side in FIG. 40 (a)) with respect to the shaft of the shaft portion 612f. It is performed in a state where it is tilted. In this state, the shaft of the collar C is inserted into the tip of the shaft portion 612f, and the protruding portion C1 positioned inside the projection plate member 620 is inserted into the notch portion 621 and the guide groove 641.

  From this state, as shown in FIG. 40 (b), the opposite side is rotated to the front side (lower side in FIG. 40 (b)) with the tip of the protrusion C1 positioned inside the projection plate member 620 as an axis. Thereby, the axis | shaft of the color | collar C can be arrange | positioned concentrically with the axis | shaft of the axial part 612f.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 40 (c), the collar C is displaced to the front side (lower side in FIG. 40 (c)), so that the tip surface of the protruding portion C1 of the collar C and the groove forming member 640 come into contact with each other. It arrange | positions in the position which a surface opposes. Thereafter, the collar C can be disposed inside the guide groove 641 by rotating the projection plate member 620.

  Here, when a groove is formed on the outer edge of the circular rotating member and a plurality of collars are arranged inside the groove, the rotating member is lifted (operated) to arrange the collar. There is a problem that it is necessary to arrange the color, and the assembly efficiency is low because both hands are used for the assembly.

  On the other hand, in the projection unit 600, since the notch 621 is formed in the projection plate member 620, it is necessary to lift (operate) the projection plate member 620 when arranging the color C as described above. Absent. Therefore, the assembly efficiency of the projection unit 600 can be improved.

  The projection unit 600 can be assembled by covering the rear base 611 from the rear side to the projection unit 600 assembled in this way.

  Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  41A to 43B are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. FIG. In FIG. 41 (b), FIG. 42 (b) and FIG. 43 (b), the cross-sectional lines are not shown for easy understanding.

  41B, 42B, and 43B, the refraction angle when the light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 is as follows. The light incident on the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is illustrated in a straight-line manner as it is considered that there is no influence on the invention. Further, in FIGS. 41 to 43, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M.

  As shown in FIGS. 41A and 41B, the light with the irradiation angle α that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 620 among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is applied to the projection plate member 620 at its outer edge. Incident from the side of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front and back side surfaces of the projection plate member 620. Thereby, the light incident on the projection plate member 620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 620 toward the center. Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine (upper side in FIG. 41 (b)).

  In this case, when the light traveling in the projection plate member 620 is irradiated on the front or back surface of the projection plate member 620 at a position where the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are adjacent to each other. It is conceivable that the amount of light that enters the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 from the front or back side surface of the projection plate member 620 and travels inside the projection plate member 620 decreases.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 are made of a light transmissive material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the light transmissive material amount of the projection plate member 620. The light traveling through the member 620 is also applied to the front or back of the projection plate member 620 even when the projection plate member 620 and the groove forming member 640 or the gear member 630 are irradiated to the front or back of the projection plate member 620. Total reflection is possible on the back side. Therefore, it can suppress that the quantity of the light which injected from the edge part of the projection plate member 620 reduces.

  That is, when the light passing through the medium having a high refractive index travels to the medium having a low refractive index, if the incident angle is increased, the light is totally reflected without entering the medium having a low refractive index. In the projection unit 600, the projection plate member 620 is formed in a plate-like body, and light is incident from the end face (edge) thereof, so that the incident angle of light is sufficiently large. Therefore, light does not enter the groove forming member 640 and the gear member 630 having a low bending rate from the projection plate member 620, and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, a decrease in the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620 can be suppressed.

  Similarly, the relationship between the projection plate member 620 and air is such that the refractive index of air is sufficiently smaller than the amount of the transmissive material (refractive index 1), and thus proceeds inside the projection plate member 620. The light is not incident on the air (in the atmosphere) from the projection plate member 620 and can be totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620. As a result, a decrease in the amount of light traveling through the projection plate member 620 can be suppressed.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 42A and 42B, the light with the irradiation angle β that irradiates the groove forming member 640 out of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 enters the groove forming member 640. Is done.

  The light incident on the groove forming member 640 can be reflected inside the groove forming member 640 and travel toward the axial center of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at a position where the side surface of the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent (facing), the light reflected from the inside of the groove forming member 640 can be incident on the projection plate member 620 side. .

  That is, at the position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the groove forming member 640 is in a state adjacent to the air (atmosphere), so that the light irradiated to the side surface can be reflected. On the other hand, at the position where the groove forming member 640 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the projection plate member 620 is formed of a light transmissive material having a refractive index lower than the refractive index of the light transmissive material amount of the projection plate member 620. Light can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

  The light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the groove forming member 640 can be totally reflected on the inner side surface of the projection plate member 620 and travel in the same manner as the light with the irradiation angle α. The reason for this is the same as in the case of the irradiation angle α, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle β can also be transmitted through the projection plate member 620, diffusely reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to increase the intensity (light quantity) of light emitted from the projection plate member 620 without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the intensity (light quantity) of the LED 651 to be irradiated. it can.

  That is, the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is not only incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but the light irradiated to the groove forming member 640 is also incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Accordingly, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly. Therefore, since the light reaching the reflection part 622 of the projection plate member 620 among the light irradiated from the light source A can be increased, the light reflected by the reflection part 622 and emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620. By increasing the amount of the pattern, the pattern or design can be clearly displayed (displayed). In addition, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the thermal influence on other members and devices can be suppressed.

  Further, since the groove forming member 640 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612), it can be difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the appearance is accordingly increased. Deterioration can be suppressed.

  Here, the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is compared to the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above. The incident angle of the light when irradiating the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640 is reduced by the amount that is shifted in the direction). This makes it difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the groove forming member 640 on its inner side surface, but at least a part of the light incident on the groove forming member 640 from the light source A is reflected, The above-described state (a state in which light is reflected by the inner side surface of the groove forming member 640) can be formed.

  Further, since the groove forming member 640 includes the inclined surface portion 643, it is possible to increase the amount of light that is irradiated at the irradiation angle β and reflected to the projection plate member 620 side. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 643 has an intersection angle θ4 that is the same as the intersection angle θ3 between the imaginary line D connecting the light source A and the end portion 644 of the LED 651 and the front portion 642 (FIG. 38). Therefore, after the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) is reflected toward the end 644, the light can travel along the inclined surface portion 643, and the light with the irradiation angle β is projected to the projection plate member. The area reflected on the 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased.

  Furthermore, since the outer diameter of the groove forming member 640 is formed larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be easily reflected by the outer edge portion of the groove forming member 640 and incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly.

  As shown in FIGS. 43A and 43B, the light with the irradiation angle γ that irradiates the gear member 630 out of the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is incident on the gear member 630.

  The light incident on the gear member 630 is reflected inside the gear member 630 and travels toward the axial center of the projection plate member 620. In this case, at a position where the side surface of the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent (facing), the light reflected from the inside of the gear member 630 can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

  That is, at a position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are not adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is in a state adjacent to the air (in contact with the atmosphere), so that the light irradiated on the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reflected. be able to. On the other hand, at the position where the gear member 630 and the projection plate member 620 are adjacent to each other, the gear member 630 is formed of a light transmissive material having a refractive index lower than that of the light transmissive material of the projection plate member 620. The emitted light can be incident on the projection plate member 620.

  Light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the gear member 630 is totally reflected inside the projection plate member 620 and travels to the axial center side of the projection plate member 620 in the same manner as light having an irradiation angle α. The reason is the same as in the case of the irradiation angle α, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle γ passes through the projection plate member 620, is irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 620 or increasing the amount of light (light amount) of the LED 651 to be irradiated.

  That is, the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is not only incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620, but also the light irradiated on the gear member 630 can be incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Accordingly, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased. Therefore, since the light reaching the reflection part 622 of the projection plate member 620 among the light emitted from the light source A can be increased, the amount of light reflected by the reflection part and emitted from the front of the light transmission member By increasing the value, the pattern or design can be clearly displayed (displayed). In addition, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the LED 651, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the thermal influence on other members and devices can be suppressed.

  Further, since the gear member 630 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612), the gear member 630 can be hardly seen by the player, and the appearance is deteriorated accordingly. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is compared with the light incident on the projection plate member 620 from the light source A described above with respect to the light source A (see FIG. 43 (a) downward direction). The incident angle at the time of irradiating the inner side surface of the gear member 630 is reduced by the amount that the position is shifted. This makes it difficult to totally reflect the light traveling inside the gear member 630 on its side surface, but at least a part of the light incident on the gear member 630 from the light source A is reflected, and the state described above. (A state in which light is reflected by the inner side surface of the gear member 630) can be formed.

  Since the gear member 630 includes the inclined surface portion 633, the amount of light that is irradiated at the irradiation angle γ and reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased. That is, as described above, the inclined surface portion 633 has an intersection angle θ2 that is the same as the intersection angle θ1 between the virtual line B connecting the light source A and the end portion 634 of the LED 651 and the back surface portion 632 (FIG. 38). Therefore, after reflecting the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) toward the end portion 634, the light can travel along the inclined surface portion 633, and the light irradiated at the irradiation angle γ The area reflected on the projection plate member 620 side can be increased. As a result, the amount of light reflected toward the projection plate member 620 can be increased.

  Moreover, since the outer diameter of the gear member 630 is formed larger than the outer diameter of the projection plate member 620, the irradiation angle β from the light source A can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the light emitted from the light source A can be easily reflected on the outer edge portion of the gear member 630 and incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, the light collection efficiency of the light incident on the side end surface of the projection plate member 620 can be increased accordingly.

  Next, a detailed configuration of the irradiation unit 650 and a mounting structure to the base member 610 will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46.

  44 (a) is a top view of the irradiation unit 650, and FIG. 44 (b) is a front view of the irradiation unit 650 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XLIVb in FIG. 44 (a). 45A is a rear view of the irradiation unit 650 when viewed in the direction of the arrow XLVa in FIG. 44A, and FIG. 45B is an irradiation unit 650 along the XLVb-XLVb line in FIG. FIG. 44 and 45 show a state before being attached to the base member 610 (front base 612) (that is, a state where the substrate member 652 is not elastically deformed).

  As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the irradiation unit 650 includes a plurality (eight in this embodiment) of LEDs 651, a substrate member 652 on which the plurality of LEDs 651 are mounted on the front surface, and a back surface of the substrate member 652. A plurality of (two in this embodiment) first blocks 653 and second blocks 654 are provided.

  The substrate member 652 is formed from a material that can be elastically deformed into a band shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front. As described above, the LED 651 is a light emitting unit that emits light for entering from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620, and a plurality of the LEDs 651 are oriented in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 with the irradiation surface facing the front surface of the substrate member 652. (FIG. 44 (b) left and right direction) are arranged at equal intervals.

  The first block 653 and the second block 654 are members interposed between the substrate member 652 and the base member 610, and two first blocks 653 are disposed on the center side in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652. In addition, second blocks 654 are disposed on both sides in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 with the first blocks 653 interposed therebetween.

  The first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape from a resin material, and have higher rigidity (characteristics that are difficult to elastically deform) than the substrate member 652. Therefore, in the state of being attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), only the portion located between adjacent blocks 653 and 654 of the substrate member 652 can be elastically deformed. Here, the first block 653 and the second block 654 will be described with reference to FIG.

  46 (a) is a front view of the first block 653, and FIG. 46 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first block 653 along the XLVIb-XLVIb line of FIG. 46 (a). FIG. 46C is a front view of the second block 654, and FIG. 46D is a cross-sectional view of the second block 654 along the XLVId-XLVId line of FIG.

  The first block 653 includes a bottom wall portion 653a that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and a side wall portion 653b that is erected from the four sides of the bottom wall portion 653a toward the front side (see FIG. 46A). It is formed in a box shape with the front side open.

  Of the four side wall parts 653b, the opposing side wall part 653b (standing from the short side of the bottom wall part 653a) is provided with a fastening hole h in the end face on the front side, and the screw S1 can be fastened. It is said. Further, the side wall portions 653b different from the side wall portion 653b in which the fastening holes h are provided are connected to each other by a connecting wall 653c, and a projection 653c1 protrudes from the front end surface of the connecting wall 653c.

  The second block 654 includes a bottom wall portion 654a that is rectangular in front view and a side wall portion 654b that is erected from the four sides of the bottom wall portion 654a toward the front side. The side) is formed in an open box shape. An opening 654a1 having a rectangular shape in front view is formed in the bottom wall portion 654a so that an electrical connection line can be inserted.

  Of the four side wall portions 654b, the side wall portion 654b erected from the short side of the bottom wall portion 654a is provided with a fastening hole h in the end surface on the front side, and the screw S1 can be fastened. Further, the side wall portions 653b erected from the long side of the bottom wall portion 654a are connected to each other by a connecting wall 654c. The connecting wall 654c has a fastening hole h formed in an end surface on the front side thereof, and a screw S1. Can be concluded.

  In the first block 653 and the second block 654, insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 are formed in two portions of each of the side wall portions 653b and 654b erected from the long side of the bottom wall portions 653a and 654a (FIG. 45). (See (a) and FIG. 46 (b)). The holding pins 612g of the front base 612 are inserted through the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1. As a result, the positions of the blocks 653 and 654 with respect to the front base 612 can be positioned and held at the positions.

  The first block 653 is symmetric with respect to a first virtual plane (that is, a virtual plane including the axes of the two fastening holes h) passing through the center in the vertical direction (FIG. 46A, vertical direction). In addition, it is formed in a shape that is symmetric with respect to a second virtual plane that passes through the center in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 46A) and is perpendicular to the first virtual plane.

  Therefore, since the first block 653 can be shared in the irradiation unit 650 in which the two first blocks 653 are arranged for one substrate member 620, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can do. Further, when the first block 653 is assembled to the substrate member 620, the first block 653 does not have both the vertical direction and the longitudinal direction with respect to the substrate member 620, so that the workability during the assembly operation is improved. Can be achieved.

  Similarly, the 2nd block 654 is with respect to the 1st virtual surface (namely, virtual plane each including the axial center of the two fastening holes h) which passes through the center of an up-down direction (FIG.46 (c) up-down direction). It is formed in a symmetrical shape.

  Therefore, since the second block 654 can be made common in the irradiation unit 650 in which the second block 654 is disposed for the substrate member 620, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced. Can do. In addition, when the second block 654 is assembled to the board member 620, the second block 654 does not have a vertical direction with respect to the board member 620, so that the workability during the assembly work is improved. Can do.

  Returning to FIG. 44 and FIG. The first block 653 and the second block 654 are arranged on the back side of the substrate member 652 with their longitudinal directions aligned with the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 and spaced apart from adjacent ones. The

  Specifically, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are overlapped with the back surface of the board member 652, and the screw S1 inserted through the insertion hole formed in the board member 652 is screwed into the fastening hole h. As a result, the substrate member 652 is fastened and fixed to the back side. In this case, the protrusion 653c1 of the first block 653 protrudes to the front side from the insertion hole formed in the board member 652.

  Only the LED 651 is disposed (mounted) on the front surface of the substrate member 652, and other electronic components and connectors are disposed (mounted) on the back surface of the substrate member 652. In this case, as described above, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are formed in a box shape with the front surface opened, and the opened side is disposed so as to overlap the back surface of the substrate member 652. That is, since both the blocks 653 and 654 are provided with a recess on the surface on which the board member 652 is overlaid (arranged), an electronic component or connector mounted on the board member 652 is provided in the recess (internal space). Can be accommodated. Therefore, the electronic component and the connector can be covered and protected by the both blocks 653 and 654, so that the electronic component and the connector are prevented from being damaged due to contact with the surrounding displacement member (for example, the projection plate member 620). it can.

  The circuit (pattern) formed on the substrate member 652 is formed on the back surface thereof. Therefore, since such a circuit can also be covered and protected by both blocks 653 and 654, it is possible to prevent the circuit from being damaged (disconnected) due to contact with a surrounding member (for example, the projection plate member 620). it can. In addition, the portion of the board member 652 where the blocks 653 and 654 are not disposed is elastically deformed (bent) into a curved shape that protrudes toward the back side (see FIG. 34), so that the circuit is projected accordingly. It can be separated from the plate member 620. Thereby, it can suppress that a circuit is damaged (disconnection) also about the part in which both blocks 653 and 654 are not arranged.

  An arrangement method (assembly method) of the irradiation unit 650 configured as described above to the base member 610 will be described. First, the irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the back surface of the front base 612 and in an area between the intermediate standing portion 611b and the outer standing portion 612c. In this case, the holding pins 612g erected from the rear surface of the front base 612 are inserted into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654 while elastically deforming (bending) the substrate member 652. .

  Thus, the blocks 653 and 654 (that is, the irradiation unit 650) are held on the back surface of the front base 612, and the position where the irradiation unit 650 is disposed (that is, the irradiation direction of the LED 651) can be positioned at a predetermined position (FIG. 34). reference). Thereafter, the front surface of the back surface base 611 is overlapped with the back surface of the front surface base 612, so that the irradiation unit 650 is accommodated between the facing surfaces (internal space) of both the bases 611 and 612. That is, the irradiation unit 650 is disposed (assembled) on the base member 610.

  In the present embodiment, in a state where the irradiation unit 650 is disposed on the base member 610, the LEDs 651 are disposed on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction as described above. That is, not only the circumferential interval of the LED 651 in one irradiation unit 650 but also the circumferential interval of the LED 651 in the one irradiation unit 650 and the irradiation unit 650 adjacent to the one irradiation unit 650 is the same interval as the other. Is done.

  Here, the projection unit 600 causes light emitted from the plurality of LEDs 651 to enter from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. Therefore, it is necessary to arrange a plurality of LEDs 651 along the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620. In addition to the large number of LEDs 651 (attachment), each LED 651 is adjusted by adjusting the irradiation surface (irradiation direction) of each LED 651 toward the center of the projection plate member 620. It is necessary to do this, and the labor of arrangement work increases.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, a plurality of (eight in this embodiment) LEDs 651 are mounted on the substrate member 652 formed to be elastically deformable, so that one substrate member 652 (irradiation unit 650). Is disposed (attached) to the front base 612 (base member 610), so that a plurality of (eight in the present embodiment) LED 651 can be disposed at once (see FIG. 34). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the trouble of arranging the LED 651 accordingly.

  Further, the holding pin 612g of the back surface base 612 is inserted into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of the first block 653 and the second block 654, so that the board member 652 can be held in a predetermined posture that is elastically deformed. The direction of the irradiated surface can be defined (see FIG. 34). That is, it is not necessary to assemble a plurality of LEDs 651 to the back base 612 while individually adjusting their irradiation surfaces, and each LED 651 is simply inserted through the holding pins 612g into the insertion holes 653b1 and 654b1 of both blocks 653 and 654. Since the attitude (irradiation direction) of the LED 651 can be set (adjusted), it is possible to suppress the trouble of disposing (attaching) the LED 651 from this point.

  In this case, the irradiation unit 650 includes a first block 653 and a second block 654 that are formed with higher rigidity than the substrate member 652, and both the blocks 653 and 654 are held by the back surface base 612. It is possible to easily regulate the posture of the substrate member 652 to a desired posture by suppressing the warpage or the deflection of the substrate member 652 due to the external force input or by correcting the warp or the deflection of the substrate member 652 itself. As a result, the posture of each LED 651 can be prevented from being affected by the warping or bending of the substrate member 652, and the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction and the orientation can be easily maintained.

  In particular, each LED 651 is arranged in a region of the board member 652 where the first block 653 or the second block 654 is disposed (that is, inside the region surrounded by the four side wall portions 653b and 654b in a front view). Established. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the warping and bending of the board member 652 due to external force input such as vibration, or to easily correct the warping and bending of the board member 652 itself, so that the posture of the board member 652 is set to a desired posture. Easy to define. As a result, the posture of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warping or bending of the substrate member 652, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be further maintained. Easy to do.

  Each LED 651 is mounted on the front surface of the board member 652, while the first block 653 and the second block 654 are disposed on the back surface of the board member 652. The LED 651 can be brought closer to the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture.

  Here, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals along the longitudinal direction of the board member 652 (the horizontal direction in FIGS. 44 and 45). That is, when the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the base member 610 (front base 612), the LEDs 651 can be arranged on the outer peripheral side of the projection plate member 620 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 34). Uniformity of light incident from the outer peripheral surface can be ensured.

  In this case, in this embodiment, since one of the fastening holes h formed in two places is formed in the connecting wall 654c, the second block 654 has a longitudinal dimension of the second block 654 correspondingly. Can be shortened. The second block 654 is disposed on the substrate member 652 in such a posture that the side wall portion 653b in which the fastening hole h is formed is on the first block 653 side. That is, the side wall part 653b in which the fastening hole h is not formed is positioned on both ends in the longitudinal direction of the board member 652.

  Accordingly, the LEDs 651 are arranged at equal intervals in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652, and the uniformity of the light incident on the projection plate member 620 is ensured while the longitudinal direction of the irradiation unit 650 (horizontal direction in FIGS. 44 and 45). ) Can be shortened, and a space can be provided between adjacent irradiation units 650 (a space can be provided). In this case, the shaft portion 612f can be disposed by using such a space, and as a result, the distance between the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be easily approached.

  On the other hand, since both the fastening holes h formed in two places are formed in the connection wall 654c, the distance between the fastening holes h and the LEDs 651 can be shortened. That is, the fastening position of the board member 652 to the first block 653 by the screw S1 can be brought close to the LED 651. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the LED 651 to be affected by the warping or bending of the board member 652 due to the input of external force such as vibration, and to easily correct the warping or bending of the board member 652 itself in the vicinity of the LED 651. Therefore, since the posture of each LED 651 can be more reliably suppressed from being affected by the warping or bending of the substrate member 652, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction and the orientation can be further maintained. Easy to do.

  In this case, in the 1st block 653, since the space | interval of the fastening hole h formed in two places becomes large, there exists a possibility that the restraint of the board | substrate member 652 between these two fastening holes h may become weak. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a connecting wall 653c is provided between the side wall portions 653b in which the fastening holes h are formed, and a protrusion 653c1 protruding from the connecting wall 653c is inserted into the board member 652. Insert it into the hole. Therefore, by engaging the protrusion 653c1 and the insertion hole, it is possible to easily suppress the warpage and bending of the board member 652 due to external force input such as vibration, or it is possible to easily correct the warping and bending of the board member 652 itself. It is possible to easily define the posture of the substrate member 652 to a desired posture. As a result, it is not necessary to provide the screw S1 separately, and the number of parts can be reduced. Therefore, the irradiation surface of each LED 651 can be directed in an appropriate direction while reducing the product cost. It is easier to maintain.

  Note that both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 (outermost in the longitudinal direction, left end and right end in FIG. 45B) are free ends (that is, not restricted by the second block 654). There is a possibility that the postures of the LEDs 651 located at both ends may become unstable. In contrast, in this embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are disposed on the back side of the substrate member 652, and the substrate member 652 is elastically deformed (bent) in a direction in which the arc center is located on the front side. ) (See FIG. 34), the elastic recovery force of the substrate member 652 can be applied as a force in a direction in which the back surfaces of both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 are pressed against the front surface of the second block 654. As a result, the postures of the LEDs 651 located at both ends in the longitudinal direction of the substrate member 652 can be stabilized.

  Next, the vertical displacement unit 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50.

  FIG. 47 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 48 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800. 49 is a front perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800, and FIG. 50 is a rear perspective view of the vertical displacement unit 800.

  As shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the vertical displacement unit 800 includes a rear base 830 that is rectangular in front view, a front base 820 that is superimposed on the front side of the rear base 830, and a rear side of the rear base 830. Disposed drive motor 880, displacement member 850 that is rotated relative to rear base 830 and front base 820 by the drive force of drive motor 880, and a transmission mechanism that transmits the drive force of drive motor 880 to displacement member 850 860, a connecting member 870 that connects the transmission mechanism 860 and the displacement member 850, and a cover member 840 that is disposed in front of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 and attached to the front base 820. .

  The rear base 830 protrudes from the respective shaft centers of the opening 831 that is formed to have a size that allows the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860 connected to the drive motor 880 to be inserted, and the transmission gears 862 and 863 of the transmission mechanism 860. It mainly includes shaft portions 832 and 833 that are formed, and a rear side regulating portion 834 that protrudes from the front side and extends in a curved shape.

  The shaft portion of the drive motor 880 attached to the back surface side of the back surface base 830 is inserted into the opening 831. Thereby, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be transmitted to the transmission mechanism 860 disposed on the front side of the rear base 830.

  The opening 831 is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the transmission gear 861 of the transmission mechanism 860. Thereby, when the transmission gear 861 is damaged, the transmission gear 861 can be detached from the vertical displacement unit 800 by removing the drive motor 880 from the back surface base 830. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of parts replacement work steps when the transmission gear 861 is damaged.

  The shaft portions 832 and 833 are shafts on which transmission gears 862 and 863 of a transmission mechanism 860 described later are pivotally supported and rotatably supported, and are formed to protrude from the back surface base 830 to the front side in a columnar shape.

  The back side regulating portion 834 is a projection that regulates displacement of the connecting member 870 described later in the back direction (the depth direction in FIG. 47), and protrudes from the front side of the back base 830 and also includes a connecting member 870 described below. It extends in a curved shape along the displacement.

  The front base 820 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in front view with a slightly larger outer shape than the back base 830. The front base 820 has a shaft support 821 that is recessed from the front side toward the back side (from the front side of FIG. 47 to the back side of the page), a side wall 822 that stands on the edge of the back side, and protrudes to the back side. A protrusion 823, a front-side regulating portion 824 that protrudes on the back side and extends in a curved shape, and a bulging portion 825 that protrudes on the back side.

  The shaft support portion 821 is a shaft hole into which one end of a pin member 890 described later is inserted, and is recessed below the right side of the front base 820 when viewed from the front.

  The side wall 822 is a wall portion for forming a gap in which a later-described transmission mechanism 860 and a connection member 870 are disposed between the back base 830 and the front base 820, and the thickness of the transmission mechanism 860 and the connection member 870 in the front-rear direction. It is erected on the upper and left and right (other than the lower end) edges of the front base 820 with a size larger than the size. Thereby, when the front base 820 and the back base 830 are fastened, the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be arranged in a displaceable state therebetween.

  The protrusion 823 is a protrusion with which one end side (upper side in FIG. 48) of an urging spring SP described later is engaged, and is formed in a columnar shape and protrudes from the back side of the front base 820.

  The front side restricting portion 824 is a protrusion that restricts the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction (the front side in FIG. 47), protrudes from the back side of the front base 820, and follows the displacement of the connecting member 870. The curved shape is extended.

  The bulging portion 825 is a projecting wall that is disposed laterally adjacent to a biasing spring SP, which will be described later, at a predetermined interval, and is formed to project from the lower end portion of the front base 820 to the back side.

  The transmission mechanism 860 is a gear train composed of transmission gears 861 to 863, and the driving force applied from the driving motor 880 is transmitted through the transmission gears 861 and 862 by engaging with each other in series. Is transmitted.

  The transmission gear 863 includes a tooth portion 863a that meshes with the transmission gear 862, a shaft portion 863b that is coupled to the coupling member 870, a projecting portion 863c that projects in an arc shape around the shaft, and a rotational position thereof. And a plate-like sensor detection plate 863d for detecting the above.

  The tooth portion 863 a is a meshing surface formed on about two-thirds of the circular side surface of the transmission gear 863, whereby the driving force can be transmitted from the transmission gear 862 to the transmission gear 863.

  The shaft portion 863b is a shaft coupled to the coupling member 870, protrudes in a columnar shape on the back side, and is disposed at a position (eccentric position) different from the rotation axis of the transmission gear 863.

  The projecting portion 863c is a projection for suppressing the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front direction. The projecting portion 863c is formed to project from the outer edge portion on the back side of the transmission gear 863 and is centered on the axis of the transmission gear 863. It is formed to be curved in a circular shape.

  The sensor detection plate 863d is a plate that blocks a detection region of a position detection sensor (not shown) disposed on the front base in order to detect the rotational position of the transmission gear 863, and is formed by a tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863. It is formed to protrude radially outward on the side surface that is not.

  The connecting member 870 is a member that transmits the rotational driving force of the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850, and is formed to be bent in a substantially C-shape when viewed from the front, with one end (upper end in FIG. 48) in the front-rear direction. A gear side connecting hole 871 formed through, a displacement side connecting hole 872 formed through the other end of the curved shape (lower end in FIG. 48) in the front-rear direction, and a contact formed by protruding upward from the outside of the curved portion. Part 873.

  The gear side connection hole 871 is a through hole into which the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 863b. Thereby, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the transmission gear 863 can be transmitted to the connecting member 870.

  The displacement side connection hole 872 is a through hole into which a shaft portion 853 of a displacement member 850 described later is inserted, and is formed in a circular shape having an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 853. Thereby, the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 can be connected, and the driving force of the connecting member 870 can be transmitted to the displacement member 850.

  The contact portion 873 is a protrusion for restricting the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the front-rear direction, and the tip is disposed between the back-side restriction portion 834 of the back surface base 830 and the front-side restriction portion 824 of the front base 820. Is done.

  Further, the contact portion 873 has a width dimension in the front-rear direction at the front end that is slightly smaller than the distance between the back-side restriction portion 834 of the back base 830 and the front-side restriction portion 824 of the front base 820. It is formed. Therefore, when the connecting member 870 is displaced, the contact portion 873 is displaced in the gap between the back-side restricting portion 834 and the front-side restricting portion 824, thereby increasing resistance when the connecting member 870 is displaced. Can be suppressed. On the other hand, when the connecting member 870 is displaced in the front-rear direction, the displacement of the connecting member 870 can be stabilized by contacting the front base 820 or the back base 830.

  The cover member 840 is a member that holds one end side (the right end portion in FIG. 47) of the displacement member 850, is formed in a vertically long rectangle when viewed from the front, and is fastened to the front base 820 with a pin member 890 interposed therebetween. . The cover member 840 is formed with a shaft support portion 841 that is recessed in a circular shape from the back side to the front side.

  The shaft support portion 841 is a groove that holds (pin supports) the pin member 890 in a rotatable state by inserting an end portion on the front side of the pin member 890, and is a position facing the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820. Formed. Thereby, since the pin member 890 is disposed between the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support portion 841 of the cover member 840, it can be prevented from falling off the vertical displacement unit 800.

  The displacement member 850 is a member with decoration on the front side, and one end side (the right side in FIG. 47) is formed in a horizontally long rectangle in front view, and the other end side (the left side in FIG. 47) is formed in a circular shape in front view. The displacement member 850 includes a shaft hole 851 through which the pin member 890 is inserted, a protrusion 852 to which the biasing spring SP is connected, and a shaft portion 853 that transmits the driving force of the connection member 870.

  The shaft hole 851 is a through hole into which the pin member 890 is inserted as described above, and is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at one end of the displacement member, and its inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the pin member 890. Is also formed large. Therefore, the displacement member 850 is disposed between the shaft support portion 821 of the front base 820 and the shaft support portion 841 of the cover member 840 while the pin member 890 is inserted through the shaft hole 851. The displacement member 850 can be disposed in front of the front base 820 in a state where the displacement member 850 can rotate about the axis of the shaft hole 851.

  The protrusion 852 is a protrusion with which the other end (the lower end in FIG. 50) of the urging spring SP is engaged, and is formed to protrude from the back side of the displacement member 850. In addition, when the displacement member 850 is disposed on the front base 820, the protrusion 852 is formed at a position protruding from the lower side of the protrusion 823 of the front base 820 to the back side, and the protruding distance is the front side of the back base. It is formed to a position substantially coinciding with the side surface. Therefore, the longitudinal direction of the urging spring SP can be made parallel to the direction of gravity. As a result, the displacement member 850 is always biased upward in the gravity direction with respect to the front base 820.

  As described above, the shaft portion 853 is a shaft that is inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870. When the displacement member 850 is disposed in the front base 820, the shaft portion 853 is below the front base 820 (FIG. 50). Projected to the lower position. Therefore, the displacement member 850 and the connecting member 870 can be connected, and the driving force of the displacement member 850 can be transmitted to the connecting member 870.

  As described above, the pin member 890 is a shaft that is inserted into the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850, and is formed from a metal rod-like body having a hardness higher than that of the displacement member 850. Thereby, when a force is applied to the rotating shaft when the displacement member 850 is displaced, the rotating shaft can be prevented from being damaged.

  Further, the resistance of the shaft portion when the displacement member 850 rotates is the resistance when the pin member 890 rotates with respect to the respective shaft support portions 821 and 841 and the resistance when the displacement member 850 rotates with respect to the pin member 890. Since the resistance can be divided into two, the resistance can be prevented from being damaged by increasing the resistance at one location.

  Next, the operation of the vertical displacement unit 800 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the first position, FIG. 52 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the intermediate position, and FIG. 53 is a front view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the second position. It is.

  54 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the first position, FIG. 55 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the intermediate position, and FIG. 56 is a rear view of the vertical displacement unit 800 at the second position. It is. 54 to 56 show a state in which the rear base 830 is removed for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, in the state where the other end side (left side in FIG. 52) of the displacement member 850 is disposed in the raised position (first position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is disposed upward, A connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is disposed above. As a result, the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 is disposed upward, so that the displacement member 850 is lifted upward.

  In the first position, the straight line connecting the shaft center of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft center of the shaft portion 863b is connected to the shaft center of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the displacement side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870. The straight line is arranged on the same straight line.

  Therefore, in the first position, the displacement member 850 can form a state in which a force component in a direction in which the transmission gear 863 is rotated by pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 is not generated (that is, a dead point). As a result, after the displacement member 850 is disposed at the first position, rattling of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed and durability can be improved.

  From the state shown in FIGS. 51 and 54, when power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and the drive motor 880 is driven to rotate, and each of the transmission gears 861, 862, and 863 (transmission mechanism 860) is rotated, The shaft portion 863b is displaced downward. Therefore, the gear side connection hole 871 of the connection member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is pushed downward as the shaft portion 863b is driven to rotate. As a result, the displacement side connection hole 872 formed on the other end side (the lower side in FIGS. 54 and 55) of the connection member 870 can push down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 and rotate the displacement member 850.

  In this case, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated, the straight line connecting the shaft center of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft center of the shaft portion 863b, the shaft center of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863, and the displacement of the connecting member 870 The straight line connecting the side connecting holes 872 is in a state of tolerance. Therefore, the state in which the displacement member 850 does not generate a force component in the direction of rotating the transmission gear 863 by pushing and pulling the connecting member 870 can be released. As a result, when the transmission gear 863 starts to rotate in the rotation direction for displacing the displacement member 850 (right rotation in FIG. 54), the force by which the gear side connection hole 871 of the connection member 780 is pulled by the gravity of the displacement member 850 is generated. The transmission gear 863 can be applied in the rotating direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress the energy consumption of the drive motor 880 when it is displaced from the first position.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 52 and 55, after displacement member 850 is displaced from the state shown in FIGS. 51 and 54 (that is, the state located at the dead point), power supply to drive motor 880 is performed. An explanation will be given when the is turned off.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 and 55, when the power supply to the drive motor 880 is turned off after being displaced from the first position, the shaft center (rotation center) of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft of the transmission gear 863 are shown. Gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and elastic recovery of the biasing spring SP at a position where the direction connecting the portion 863b and the direction connecting the gear side connection hole 871 and the displacement side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 are substantially orthogonal to each other. The force is balanced (intermediate position).

  Therefore, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the first position to the second position described later, the power supply to the drive motor 880 is turned off, so that the displacement member 850 is centered on the intermediate position (balanced position). It is possible to cause the displacement member 850 to perform reciprocal displacement due to the acting weight and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP. In other words, the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the gravitational direction can be an orthogonal projection motion of constant velocity circular motion, and the displacement speed can be changed, so that the displacement member can be subjected to an interesting displacement.

  On the other hand, if electric power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and a driving force is applied from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 via the connecting member 870, it is different from the above-described displacement (normal projection motion of constant velocity circular motion). In the aspect, the displacement member 850 can be displaced between the first position and the second position, and the variation of the displacement can be increased accordingly. That is, it is possible to increase the variation of displacement simply by turning on / off the power supply to the drive motor 880 and switching whether or not to apply the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850. Since it is not necessary to make it complicated, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve the reliability.

  Further, as described above, since the displacement member 850 is rotationally displaced with the shaft hole 851 as an axis, the application of the driving force of the displacement member 850 from the transmission mechanism 860 is released, and the action of gravity of the displacement member 850 is achieved. When the reciprocating displacement due to the elastic restoring force of the urging spring SP is performed by the displacement member 850, the displacement on the other end side (left side in FIG. 52) of the displacement member 850 is not limited to the linear motion in the vertical direction, Displacement combined with rotational movement about the shaft hole 851 can also be used. As a result, it is possible to cause the displacement member 850 to perform an interesting displacement.

  In this case, the connecting member 870 connected to the displacement member 850 is pushed and pulled (displaced in the vertical direction) in accordance with the displacement of the displacement member 850 to rotate the transmission gear 863. Since the posture of 863 is changed, the magnitude of the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member in the push-pull direction can be changed. That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocally displaced, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member 850 receives from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connection member 870 can be changed. As a result, a change can be given to the displacement speed of the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850, and an interesting displacement can be made to the displacement member.

  Furthermore, as described above, in the state where the gravity acting on the displacement member 850 and the elastic recovery force of the biasing spring SP are balanced (intermediate position), the shaft center of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 are Since the straight line connecting the shaft centers and the straight line connecting the shaft center of the gear side connection hole 871 and the shaft side of the displacement side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 are substantially orthogonal to each other, The magnitude of the force component in the direction in which the transmission gear 863 is rotated is maximized at the balance position (intermediate position), and the force component can be reduced in any direction from the balance position to the push-pull direction. . That is, when the displacement member 850 is reciprocally displaced, the resistance that the displacement member 850 receives from the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870 can be changed substantially symmetrically with respect to the balanced position. Can be continued easily.

  52 and 55, when electric power is supplied to the drive motor 880 and the transmission gears 861, 862, and 863 (transmission mechanism 860) are further rotated, the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is further lowered. Is displaced. Therefore, the gear side connection hole 871 of the connection member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is pushed downward further as the shaft portion 863b is driven to rotate. As a result, the displacement side connection hole 872 formed on the other end side of the connection member 870 can push down the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 and rotate the displacement member 850.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, in the state where the other end side (left side in FIG. 53) of the displacement member 850 is disposed at the lowered position (second position), the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 is disposed below. The connecting member 870 connected to the shaft portion 863b is disposed below. Thereby, since the axial part 853 of the displacement member 850 inserted in the displacement side connection hole 872 of the connection member 870 is arrange | positioned below, the displacement member 850 can be made into the attitude | position pressed down below.

  In the second position, the straight line connecting the shaft center of the transmission gear 863 and the shaft center of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863, the shaft center of the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863, and the displacement side connection of the connecting member 870 are connected. The straight line connecting the axial centers of the holes 872 is arranged at the same straight line length.

  Therefore, in the second position, a state can be formed in which the displacement member 850 does not generate a force component in the direction of rotating the transmission gear 863 by pushing and pulling the connecting member 870. As a result, after the displacement member 850 is disposed at the second position, rattling of the displacement member 850 can be suppressed and durability can be improved.

  Next, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 will be described with reference to FIG. 57 (a) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the first position, and FIG. 57 (b) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the intermediate position. (C) is a rear view of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the second position. 57 (a) to 57 (c), a part of the transmission gear 863 (the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 positioned in front of the connecting member 870) is indicated by a broken line.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (a), in the first position, the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is disposed at a position facing the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the gap in the front-rear direction of the connecting member 870 disposed between the back surface base 830 and the transmission gear 863 can be reduced, the connecting member 870 can be easily brought into contact with the back surface base 830 or the transmission gear 863.

  Therefore, in the first position, it is possible to increase the resistance when driving the displacement member 850. As a result, in the first position, it is preferable that the displacement member 850 is in a stopped state in order to form a retracted state in which the displacement member 850 is disposed upward and the third symbol display device 81 is visible from the player. However, it is possible to easily maintain the stopped state by increasing the resistance for driving the displacement member 850.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 57 (b) and 57 (c), power is applied to the drive motor 880 and the transmission gear 863 is rotated more than a certain amount (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 is in the second state). In the state where the driving range θ6 is driven), the connecting member 870 and the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 are not opposed to each other in the front-rear direction.

  Therefore, if the transmission gear 863 is rotated more than a certain amount, the gap in the front-rear direction of the coupling member 870 disposed between the transmission gear 863 and the back surface base 830 can be increased, so that resistance when the coupling member 870 is displaced is increased. Can be reduced.

  Therefore, when displacing the displacement member 850 from the first position to the second position, it is preferable to displace it in front of the third symbol display device 81 in a short time, but the resistance for displacing the connecting member 870 is reduced. The displacement member 850 can be displaced from the first position to the second position in a short time.

  As shown in FIG. 57C, the contact portion 873c of the connecting member 870 can be brought into contact with the tooth portion 863a of the transmission gear 863 at the second position.

  Here, when the displacement member that is displaced up and down is displaced downward and stopped, the gravity of the displacement member is added to the inertial force at the time of stop, so that the displacement member cannot be stopped quickly. was there.

  On the other hand, when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the vertical displacement unit 800 can abut the abutting portion 873c of the connecting member 870 on the transmission gear 863. The force for stopping the rotation of the transmission gear 863 is 2 between the force stopped when the connecting member 870 comes into contact with the transmission gear 863 and the force stopped when the rotation of the transmission gear 863 (driving of the drive motor 880) is stopped. Can be distributed in one. As a result, the displacement member 850 that has been displaced from the first position to the second position of the displacement member 850 can be quickly stopped at the second position.

  Next, the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 when displaced from the first position will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c). 58 (a) to 58 (c) are rear views of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 in the first drive range θ5. 58 (a) to 58 (c) illustrate a transition state from the first position. 58 (a) to 58 (c), a part of the transmission gear 863 (the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 positioned in front of the connecting member 870) is indicated by a broken line.

  58 (a) to 58 (c), when the transmission gear 863 is rotated and the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 displaces the first drive range θ5, the second position is changed from the first position to the second position. As the position is displaced, the portion where the projecting portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 face each other can be reduced.

  Therefore, when the transmission gear 863 is rotated from the first position, the resistance for displacing the displacement member 850 can be reduced along with the displacement, so that the displacement member 850 can be smoothly displaced.

  Further, when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the second position to the first position, the sliding resistance of the displacement member 850 can be increased while being displaced to the first position of the retracted position. The displacement member 850 can be quickly brought into a stopped state when it is displaced to a position and stopped.

  That is, when the displacement member 850 is displaced and stopped, it is difficult to quickly form a stop state due to the inertial force that stops the operation. However, since the resistance of the displacement member 850 can be increased, the stop state can be quickly formed. can do.

  On the other hand, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 displaces the second drive range θ6, the protruding portion 863c of the transmission gear 863 and the connecting member 870 are not disposed at positions facing each other in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the resistance for displacing the displacement member 850 can be reduced. As a result, when the shaft portion 863b of the transmission gear 863 drives the second drive range θ6, the displacement member 850 can be quickly displaced, and the effect effect by the extending operation of the displacement member 850 can be enhanced.

  Further, in the second driving range θ6, when the driving force from the transmission mechanism 860 to the displacement member 850 is released, and the reciprocating displacement is performed with the displacement member 850 being the center of the intermediate position (balanced position), the projecting configuration is provided. Generation of resistance by the portion 863c can be avoided, and the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member 850 can be performed smoothly.

  Next, the contact portion 873, the front base 820, and the back base 830 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 taken along line LIXa-LIXa in FIG. 54, and FIG. 59B is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 taken along line LIXb-LIXb in FIG. FIG. 59C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the vertical displacement unit 800 taken along the line LIXc-LIXc in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 (a) and 59 (b), the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 is between the front-side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back-side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830. Placed in.

  That is, the front-side regulating portion 824 of the front base 820 and the back-side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830 are formed in a curved shape accompanying the displacement of the tip of the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. Thereby, the displacement of the connecting member 870 in the front-rear direction is restricted.

  Here, since the connecting member 870 and the displacement member 850 are in a state in which the shaft portion 853 is inserted into the displacement-side connection hole 872, the clearance between the shaft and the hole is inclined in the front-rear direction due to the gravity of the displacement member 850. Thus, there is a problem that the displacement side connecting hole 872 or the shaft portion 853 is deformed.

  On the other hand, since the vertical displacement unit 800 is restrained from being tilted in the front-rear direction by the contact portion 873, the displacement member 850 can be displaced smoothly.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (c), when the displacement member 850 is displaced to the second position, the position where the back side regulating portion 834 of the back base 830 faces the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870. It can be set as the state which is not arrange | positioned.

  Thereby, the clearance gap between the contact part 873 of the connection member 870 in the 2nd position, the front base 820, and the back surface base 830 can be enlarged. As a result, the resistance when the displacement member 850 is displaced from the second position to the first position can be reduced, and the displacement member 850 can be easily displaced from the second position.

  Further, the vertical displacement unit 800 has an abutment portion 873 substantially on a straight line connecting the shaft center of the shaft portion 853 of the displacement member 850 and the shaft center of the gear side connection hole of the connection member 870, and the transmission gear 863 and It is arranged on the opposite side to the axis of the shaft hole 851 of the displacement member 850 across the axis of the gear side connection hole of the connection member 870 (see FIG. 54).

  Therefore, when the connecting member 870 rattles against the front base 820 and the back base 830, the contact portion 873 of the connecting member 870 comes into contact with the front base 820 and the back base 830, so that the shaft of the transmission gear 863 is The inclination of the gear side connection hole 871 of the part 863b and the connection member 870 can be easily suppressed. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 880 can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member 850 via the transmission mechanism 860 and the connecting member 870.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is set to be smaller than that of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640. However, in the second embodiment, the outer diameter dimension of the projection plate member 620 is set. The outer diameter of the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is set to be the same.

  First, the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 60A is a front view of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 60B is a projection along the LXb-LXb line in FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a plate member 2620, a gear member 630, and a groove forming member 2640.

  As shown in FIGS. 60A and 60B, gear members 630 and groove forming members 2640 are disposed on the rear and front sides of the outer peripheral edge of the projection plate member 2620, respectively. Projection plate member 2620 is formed in a circular plate-like body in front view, and has an outer diameter that is the same as the outer diameters of gear member 630 and groove forming member 2640. In addition, the projection plate member 2620 includes a cutout portion 621 and a reflection portion 622 that diffusely reflects light at a part of the outer edge.

  The groove forming member 2640 is made of a light-transmitting material having a refractive index lower than that of the projection plate member 2620. The groove forming member 2640 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has a U-shaped cross section that is concave from the outer edge side to the inner edge side. The guide groove 2641 is provided. The groove forming member 2640 is disposed on the front side of the projection plate member 2620 (the upper side in FIG. 60B), and its axis is disposed coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 2620. Further, the groove forming member 2640 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612).

  The guide groove 2641 is a groove that guides the collar C inward, and has a recessed width larger than the axial dimension of the protrusion C1 of the collar C. Therefore, the plurality of collars C that are rotatably supported by the base member 610 are guided by the guide grooves 2641, so that the projection plate member 2620 is rotatably held by the base member 610.

  Next, the light emitted from the LED 651 (light source A) will be described with reference to FIGS.

  61 to 63 are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640. In FIG. 61 (b), FIG. 62 (b) and FIG. 63 (b), the cross-sectional lines are not shown for easy understanding.

  In FIGS. 61 (b), 62 (b), and 63 (b), the light from the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 as in the first embodiment. The refraction angle at this time is considered as having no influence on the present invention, and the light incident on the projection plate member 2620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 2640 from the light source A is shown in a straight line manner. Further, in FIGS. 61 to 63, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M, as in the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 61A and 61B, the light with the irradiation angle α2 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 2620 among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is applied to the projection plate member 620 with its outer edge. Incident from the side of the part. The light incident on the projection plate member 2620 is reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front and back side surfaces of the projection plate member 2620. Thereby, the light incident on the projection plate member 2620 can travel from the edge side of the projection plate member 2620 toward the central portion (axial center). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α1 passes through the projection plate member 2620, is irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine.

  In this case, the projection plate member 2620 is formed to have a larger outer dimension than the projection plate member 620 in the first embodiment. Thereby, the edge part of the projection board member 2620 can be arrange | positioned near LED651 (light source A). Therefore, since the irradiation angle α2 of the second embodiment can be made larger than the irradiation angle α1 of the first embodiment, the amount of light (light quantity) projected onto the projection plate member 2620 can be increased accordingly. it can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the amount of light emitted from the LED 651.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 (a) and 62 (b), irradiation of the groove forming member 640 on the front side (upper side of FIG. 62 (a)) from the guide groove 641 out of the light irradiated from the light source A of the LED 651. Light having an angle β2 is incident on the front edge of the groove forming member 2640.

  The light irradiated to the range of the irradiation angle β2 and incident on the groove forming member 2640 is reflected inside the groove forming member 2640 and travels toward the axial center of the projection plate member 2620. In this case, similarly to the first embodiment, at the position where the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the projection plate member 2620 are adjacent (facing), the light irradiated on the inner side surface of the groove forming member 2640 is projected to the projection plate member 2620. It can be made to enter.

  As shown in FIGS. 63A and 63B, the groove forming member 2640 on the back side (the lower side in FIG. 62A) of the guide groove 641 among the light emitted from the light source A of the LED 651 is irradiated. The light with the irradiation angle Δ2 is incident from the rear edge of the groove forming member 2640.

  The light that is irradiated in the range of the irradiation angle Δ2 and is incident on the groove forming member 2640 is irradiated to the side surface of the guide groove 2641 of the groove forming member 2640 and reflected. The reflected light can be incident on the projection plate member 2620 by irradiating the side surface of the groove forming member 2640 and the side surface of the position where the projection plate member 2620 is adjacent (facing).

  That is, by making the guide groove 2641 concave on the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, light incident on the groove forming member 2640 from between the guide groove 2641 and the projection plate member 2620 is reflected on the side surface of the guide groove 2641. It can be reflected and incident on the projection plate member 2620.

  Therefore, by forming the guide groove 2641 so as to be recessed in the side surface of the outer edge of the groove forming member 2640, it is possible to combine the role of holding the collar C and the role of collecting light on the projection plate member 2620. .

  Compared with the first embodiment, the amount of light (light quantity) incident on the projection plate member 2620 from the groove forming member 2640 can be increased by the addition of the irradiation angle Δ. Therefore, the intensity (light quantity) of light emitted from the projection plate member 2620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 2620 or increasing the light intensity (light quantity) of the LED 651 to be irradiated. .

  Furthermore, since the groove forming member 2640 is disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612), it can be difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the appearance is accordingly increased. Deterioration can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the light which irradiates the gear member 630 among the lights irradiated from the light source A of LED651 is the same as that of 1st Embodiment, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the state where the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 are grounded over the entire outer periphery of the projection plate member 620 has been described. However, the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 640 in the third embodiment are A floating surface is formed with respect to the projection plate member 3620.

  First, the shapes of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 will be described with reference to FIGS. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 64A is a front view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 64B is a projection along the line LXIVb-LXIVb in FIG. 6 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a plate member 3620, a gear member 3630, and a groove forming member 640. FIG.

  FIG. 65 (a) is a side view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVa in FIG. 64 (a), and FIG. 65 (b) is a side view of FIG. FIG. 65C is a cross-sectional view of the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 640 along the line LXVb-LXVb, and FIG. 65C is a diagram of the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 along the LXVc-LXVc line in FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the groove forming member 640. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the projection plate member 3620 in the third embodiment is formed in a plate-like body having a circular shape in front view, and a gear member 3630 and a groove forming member 3640 are provided on the rear side and the front side at the outer peripheral edge thereof. It is arranged on each side. Further, the projection plate member 3620 has an outer diameter larger than that of the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, and a protrusion 3623 that protrudes to the front side and the back side is formed on the outer edge thereof.

  The protrusion 3623 is formed in a substantially triangular cross section that protrudes to the front side (upper side in FIG. 64 (b)) or the rear side (lower side in FIG. 64 (b)) toward the outer edge. Further, the protrusion 3623 protruding to the front side is set on the imaginary line F connecting the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge end of the groove 3645 formed in the groove forming member 3640 described later. Is done. On the other hand, the protrusion 3623 that protrudes to the back side is set at the tip of the imaginary line G that connects the light source A of the LED 651 and the outer edge of the groove 3635 formed in the gear member 3630 described later. The

  The gear member 3630 is formed in an annular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. Further, the gear member 3630 includes a groove 3635 that is recessed in the side surface on the front side (upper side in FIG. 64B) with a predetermined interval, and a screw that is formed to penetrate in the circumferential direction with a predetermined interval. A stop hole 636 for use.

  The recessed grooves 3635 are grooves that are recessed in the radial direction, and are formed on both circumferential sides of each retaining hole 636. Thereby, when the gear member 3630 is disposed on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 (see FIG. 64B).

  The groove forming member 3640 is formed in an annular plate-like body when viewed from the front, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the projection plate member 620. Further, the groove forming member 3640 is formed so as to penetrate the side surface on the back side (the lower side in FIG. 64 (b)) with a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction and a concave groove 3645 which is recessed with a predetermined interval. And an opening 646 for screwing.

  The concave groove 3645 is a groove provided in the radial direction, and is formed at a position facing the concave groove 3636 formed in the gear member 3630. Thus, when the groove forming member 3640 is disposed on the projection plate member 3620, a gap can be formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630.

  In this case, the surface on which the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 are grounded is, as shown in FIG. 65, an opening 646 for inserting the bolt T for fastening the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630. The surfaces overlap in the radial direction. Accordingly, when a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the holding force. That is, when the gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the gear member 3630 and the groove forming member 3640, the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove formation member 3640 can be grounded by the diameter of the opening 646. Therefore, a holding surface for sandwiching the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 can be secured.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the light irradiated from LED651 (light source A) is demonstrated.

  66A and 66B are schematic cross-sectional views of the projection plate member 620, the gear member 630, and the groove forming member 640. FIG. In FIG. 66B, the cross-sectional line is not shown for easy understanding.

  In FIG. 66B, similarly to the first embodiment, the refraction angle when the light from the light source A enters the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 affects the present invention. The light incident on the projection plate member 3620, the gear member 3630, and the groove forming member 3640 from the light source A is shown in a straight line state. Furthermore, in FIG. 66, the boundary between the display area and the outside of the display area is indicated by a virtual line M as in the first embodiment.

  66A and 66B, among the light irradiated from the light source A of the LED 651, the light with the irradiation angle α3 that irradiates the outer surface of the projection plate member 3620 is emitted from the outer edge of the projection plate member 3620. Incident from the side.

  The light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is totally reflected at the same angle as the incident angle by irradiating the front and back side surfaces of the projection plate member 3620. Accordingly, light incident on the projection plate member 3620 can travel from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center side (axial center side). Therefore, the light of the light source A irradiated at the irradiation angle α3 passes through the projection plate member 3620, is irregularly reflected by the reflecting portion 622, and is emitted to the front side of the gaming machine.

  In this case, in the third embodiment, since a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 is reflected by the reflecting portion 622. Can be easily reached. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the projection plate member 3620 can be easily made to reach the reflection portion 622, so that the light reflected by the reflection portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620 is strengthened. And the design can be clearly revealed.

  On the other hand, light irradiated at an irradiation angle other than the irradiation angle α3 is incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630. In this case, since the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member are arranged with a gap as described above, the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 or the gear member 3630 is the first implementation. It is not incident on the projection plate member 620 side as in the embodiment.

  Therefore, the light of the light source other than the light source A of the LED 651 is incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 so that the light of the light source other than the light source A is incident on the projection plate member 3620 side. Can be prevented from entering. Thereby, it can suppress that the display given to the reflection part 622 of the projection board member 3620 floats (displays) with lights other than LED651.

  Further, as described above, the grounding surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is a surface that overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65 (c)). A place where light is not incident can be a ground plane.

  That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when light is incident from the outside in the radial direction of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T, and the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 from being incident on the projection plate member 3620 side.

  Further, in this case, the grounding surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 can be formed over the entire surface overlapping the opening 646 in the radial direction, so that the grounding surface can be secured and projected. The groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 can be prevented from shifting with respect to the plate member 3620.

  Here, if a gap is formed between the projection plate member 3620 and the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630, the light of the LED 651 is inserted from the gap to the axial center side of the projection plate member 3620, There is a possibility that light leaks from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 to the center.

  On the other hand, since the projection 3623 is formed at the edge of the projection plate member 3620 of the third embodiment, the light from the light source A of the LED 651 is reflected between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630. The gap is not irradiated. Therefore, light can be prevented from leaking from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 to the center.

  Furthermore, the projection 3623 can increase the dimension of the edge side surface of the projection plate member 3620 in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 66 (a)), so that the irradiation angle α3 can be increased. Therefore, the intensity (light quantity) of light emitted from the projection plate member 3620 can be increased without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 3620 or increasing the intensity (light quantity) of the LED 651 to be irradiated. .

  Next, an irradiation unit 4650 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 67A is a top view of the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 67B is a cross-sectional view of the irradiation unit 4650. FIG. 68A is a partial enlarged schematic view of the projection unit 4600 in the vicinity of the first block 653, and FIG. 68B is a partial enlarged schematic view of the projection unit 4600 in the vicinity of the second block 654. FIG. 67 (b) corresponds to FIG. 44 (b). Further, FIG. 68 schematically shows a state where the irradiation unit 4650 is disposed on the base member 610.

  As shown in FIG. 67, in the irradiation unit 4650 in the fourth embodiment, the first block 653 and the second block 654 are fastened and fixed to the board member 620 by screws S2. In this case, the screw S2 is set such that the height dimension of the head (the vertical dimension in FIG. 67) is larger than the height dimension of the LED 651. That is, the protruding amount of the screw S2 from the front surface of the substrate member 620 is made larger than the protruding amount of the LED 651.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, the height dimension of the head of the screw S2 is such that the projection plate member 620 is placed on the head of one screw S2 and the screw S2 adjacent to the one screw S2. When the outer peripheral surface comes into contact (externally), the dimension is set such that the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 cannot contact the LED 651 disposed between the two screws S2.

  Thereby, LED651 can be protected by the head of screw S2. In other words, when the projection plate member 620 is rotated, for example, when the projection plate member 620 is brought close to the irradiation unit 2650 due to radial backlash based on dimensional tolerance or assembly tolerance, the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 is screwed. Contact with the head of S2 can avoid contact with the LED 651, and as a result, the LED 651 can be prevented from being damaged.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the projection plate member 620 is formed from a resin material, whereas the screw S2 is formed from a metal material, so that the LED 651 is protected when the projection plate member 620 rattles in the radial direction. Can enhance the effect. Further, when the projection plate member 620 is continuously rotated while being in contact with the screw S2, since the projection plate member 620 is worn, the projection plate member 620 rattles in the radial direction. In addition, the contact with the LED 651 can be avoided.

  As described above, the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2, so that the formation of the intermediate standing portions 611b and 612b can be omitted. Therefore, in this case, since complicated shapes can be omitted, the shapes of the back base 611 and the front base 612 can be simplified, and the moldability in the resin molding can be improved. As a result, the yield can be improved.

  Further, since the LED 651 can be protected by using the screw S2, the allowable amount of radial shakiness caused by the dimensional tolerance and assembly tolerance of the parts can be moderated, so that the degree of freedom in design can be increased. That is, the LED 651 and the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620 can be brought closer to each other, and as a result, the light emitted from the LED 651 can be efficiently incident on the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 620.

  Next, a projection unit 5600 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the first embodiment, the case where the projection plate member 620 is formed in a disk shape when viewed from the front and is rotated around the center of the circle has been described. However, in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 is a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. A case will be described in which the sliding displacement is made in one direction.

  First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 69 is a front view of a projection unit 5600 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 70 is an exploded front perspective view of the projection unit 5600. 71 is a rear view of the front base 5612. FIG. FIG. 72 is a rear view of the projection unit 5600. FIG. 72 shows a state in which the rear base 5611 is removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 69 to 72, the projection unit 5600 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and has a base member 5610 whose central portion is open, and is slidably disposed in an opening portion of the base member 5610. Projection plate member 5620, an irradiation unit 650 for making light incident from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 5620, a drive motor 661 for slidably displacing the projection plate member 5620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661. And a gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668) for transmission to 5620.

  The base member 5610 is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a rear base 5611 whose central portion is opened in a horizontally long rectangular shape is disposed in front of the rear base 5611 and has substantially the same outer shape as the rear base 5611. And a projection plate member 5620, an irradiation unit 650, and a gear train (gears 662-664, 5665) in an internal space formed between the opposing surfaces of the rear base 5611 and the front base 5612. 5668) is stored.

  As described above, the front base 5612 is a plate member that is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and has an outer standing portion 612c that is erected at the outer edge on the back side, and an opening that is horizontally long when viewed from the center. A central opening 5612h, an inner standing part 612a standing on the back side edge of the central opening 5612h, a pair of left and right holding parts 5612i protruding from both upper ends of the central opening 5612h, It is mainly formed by two shaft portions 5612k that are formed to project from the gap between the pair of holding portions 5612i to the back side, and a sliding projection 5612m that is formed to project from the lower side of the central opening 5612h to the back side. The

  The central opening 5612h is opened in a horizontally long rectangular shape at the front center of the front base 5612. The player can visually recognize the pattern and symbols of the third symbol display device 81 disposed on the back side of the projection unit 5600 through the central opening 5612h.

  The holding portion 5612i is a protruding portion for holding a rod member 5625, which will be described later, and is formed to protrude from the back side (front side in FIG. 71) of the front base 5612 at both upper ends of the central opening 5612h. In addition, the holding portion 5612i is formed with a recessed groove 5612i1 that is recessed in a manner of being recessed on the front side (the back side in FIG. 71) on the protruding surface.

  The groove 5612i1 is recessed in a cross-sectional arc shape from the center in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 71) of the front base 5612, and the inner diameter of the groove 5612i1 is the outer diameter of a rod member 5625 described later. Is formed larger. The pair of concave grooves 5612i1 are formed at the same height in the vertical direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 71), and the distance between the ends in the horizontal direction (the horizontal direction in FIG. 71) is the axis of the rod member 5625. It is set larger than the directional dimension. Therefore, after disposing the rod member 5625 on the inner peripheral surface of the concave groove 5612i1, a groove having a radius larger than the outer diameter of the rod member 5625 at a position facing the concave groove 5612i1 from the back side (the front side in FIG. 71). By disposing the holding unit cover 5628 provided with both ends, the bar member 5625 can be disposed on the front base 5612 (see FIG. 72).

  The shaft portion 5612k is a projection serving as a rotation shaft of a rotating member 5670 described later, and is disposed at a symmetrical position about a perpendicular passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612 above the central opening portion 5612h.

  The sliding protrusion 5612m is a protrusion that guides the displacement of a rack 5627, which will be described later, and is formed in a cylindrical shape protruding from the lower side to the back side of the central opening 5612h. The pair of sliding protrusions 5612m are arranged at symmetrical positions with respect to a perpendicular passing through the center of the disk-shaped front base 5612.

  The projection plate member 5620 is made of a light transmissive material, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player. When the light of the LED 651 is incident, the incident light is changed into a pattern or The light is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 in a pattern-shaped manner. That is, a pattern or a pattern can be raised (displayed) on the front of the third symbol display device 81.

  The projection plate member 5620 includes a rack 5627 extending in the left-right direction at the lower end portion, and a reflection portion 622 formed inside the projection plate member 5620. The rack 5627 is disposed below the central opening of the base member 610 (central opening 5612h of the front base 5612), and is disposed at a position where it cannot be seen from the front side of the projection unit 5600 in the assembled state. The rack 5627 is formed in a horizontally long rectangle when viewed from the front, and its longitudinal dimension is set longer than the dimension of the projection plate member 5620 in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72). Thereby, the movable range of the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 can be made larger than the horizontal dimension of the projection plate member 5620.

  In the rack 5627, a rack gear 5627a meshed with the gear 5668 is engraved on the lower surface, and a sliding groove 5627b penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the center.

  The rack gear 5627a is a gear tooth surface that displaces the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) in the left-right direction when the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted through a gear train (gears 662-664, 5665-5668). Yes, and formed on the entire lower surface side of the rack 5627.

  The sliding groove 5627b is a groove for preventing the rack 5627 from tilting when the rack 5627 is displaced in the left-right direction by the drive of the drive motor 661, and is opened long in the left-right direction. A pair of sliding protrusions 5612m of the base 5612 are inserted. Thereby, when the rack 5627 is displaced with respect to the back surface base 5611, the displacement direction is regulated, and the rack 5627 is slid. The detailed operation of the rack 5627 (projection plate member 5620) will be described later.

  Above the rear side of the projection plate member 5620, a columnar bar member 5625 extending in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72), and a rectangular shape in front view at a position facing the projection plate member 5620 across the bar member 5625. A front cover 5626 having a shape is disposed.

  The rod member 5625 is formed to be longer in the left-right direction than the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620 and shorter than the outer diameter of the rear base 5611, and the front cover 5626 and the projection plate member 5620 are formed. The projection plate member 5620 is interposed between the projection plate members 5620.

  The front cover 5626 is a plate member guided by the bar member 5625, and the length dimension in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72) is set to be substantially the same as the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 5620. A rod member 5625 is sandwiched between the projection plate member 5620 and the member 5620.

  The front cover 5626 includes a groove portion 5626a that is recessed in the front side (the rear side in FIG. 72) on the side surface facing the projection plate member 5620 and recessed in the left-right direction. The groove portion 5626a is a groove in which the rod member 5625 is disposed inside, and is recessed in a substantially U-shaped cross section. The recessed dimension in the vertical direction and the front side is set larger than the outer diameter size of the rod member 5625. Is done.

  Thereby, the rod member 5625 can be disposed inside the groove 5626a. Thereby, the projection plate member 5620 can be slidably displaced in the axial direction of the bar member 5625 with respect to the bar member 5625.

  Further, the bar member 5625 is disposed on the back side with respect to the front side surface of the front cover 5626. That is, since the rod member 5625 does not protrude from the front surface of the front cover 5626, the front cover 5626 can be disposed on the projection plate member 5620 without forming a concave portion on the projection plate member 5620.

  Here, if the bar member 5625 protrudes from the front surface of the front cover 5626, a groove for inserting the bar member 5625 needs to be formed on the back side of the projection plate member 5620. However, the projection plate member 5620 is a member that emits light incident on the projection plate member 5620 from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620 in a pattern or pattern shape. If the thickness dimension is partially reduced, the light incident on the inside of the projection plate member 5620 becomes difficult to travel as much as the thickness dimension is reduced, and the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 is reduced. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the projection plate member 5620 can be disposed on the front cover 5626 in which the rod member 5625 is disposed without changing the thickness of the projection plate member 5620. As a result, it is possible to suppress the light entering the projection plate member 5620 from becoming difficult to travel, and to suppress the amount of light emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 5620 from decreasing.

  Further, as described above, since both ends of the rod member 5625 are disposed on the front base 5612 so as not to drop off, the projection plate member 5620 can slide in the axial direction of the rod member 5625 with respect to the front base 5612. Retained. That is, the projection plate member 5620 is suspended from the rod member 5625 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 72).

  Therefore, when a driving force is applied to the driving motor 661, the driving force is transmitted to the rack 5627 through the gear train (gears 662 to 664, 5665 to 5668), and the rack 5627 is slid in the left-right direction. . When the rack 5627 is slid in the left-right direction, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 can be displaced in the sliding direction.

  In the irradiation unit 650, the first block 653 is arranged in a substantially linear shape along the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the LED 651 arranged in front of the first block is connected to the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. It arrange | positions in the position to oppose. As a result, the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 can be made incident from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620, and the pattern or design of the reflection portion 622 of the projection plate member 5620 can be raised.

  In addition, the side surface of the front base 5612 on which the first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is disposed is formed with a bulging portion 5612n that bulges in a substantially rectangular shape in the rear view on the back side (the front side in FIG. 71). The bulging part 5612n is a part for raising the first block 653 to the back side, and the raising dimension is set larger than the plate thickness of the rotating member 5670 described later. Accordingly, a rotation member 5670 described later can be disposed in the gap between the second block 654 and the front base 6512.

  Further, a protrusion 612g is formed on the bulging portion 5612n. The first block 653 of the irradiation unit 650 is disposed in the irradiation unit 5600 by inserting the protrusion 612g into the insertion hole 653b1 and being sandwiched between the front base 5612 and the rear base 5611.

  A rotation member 5670 is attached to the front side of the second block 654 disposed at both ends of the irradiation unit 650.

  The rotating member 5670 is a plate member that is bent in an L shape when viewed from the front. The rotating member 5670 is disposed on the front base 5612 in a state where the bent portion is positioned on the center side in the left-right direction, and the irradiation unit on one side of the long side. A second block 654 of 650 is attached. Further, a through hole 5671 penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the bent portion of the rotating member 5670.

  The through hole 5671 is an opening into which the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 is inserted, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 5612k. Therefore, when the rotation member 5670 is disposed on the front base 5612, the rotation member 5670 can rotate around the shaft portion 5612 k with respect to the front base 5612.

  Here, since the irradiation unit 650 is attached to the rotating member 5670, the irradiation unit 650 can be displaced when the rotating member 5670 is rotated with respect to the front base 5612. That is, by displacing the rotation member 5670, the base member 652 of the irradiation unit 650 can be bent and the second block 654 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653.

  The rotating member 5670 is urged in a direction to displace the tip portion on one side downward with respect to the shaft portion 5612k by an urging spring (not shown) interposed between the rotating member 5670 and the front base 5612. 5612 is disposed. Further, a displacement restricting protrusion 5612j that protrudes to the back side is formed below the shaft portion 5612k of the front base 5612 on which the rotating member 5670 is disposed.

  The displacement restricting projection 5612j is a member that restricts the downward displacement of one end of the rotating member 5670, and the rear end of the projecting tip is disposed on the front base 5612 (on the back base 5611 side). In addition to being positioned, it is formed on the front side (front base 5612 side) of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 attached to the rotating member 5670. As a result, the downward displacement of one end of the rotating member 5670 is regulated by the displacement regulating projection 5612j, and the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 to the projection plate member 5620 side is displaced by the displacement regulating projection. Blocking by 5612j can be suppressed.

  Next, the operation of the projection unit 5600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 (a) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 73 (b) is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. 74 (a) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 74 (b) is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state.

  FIG. 75A is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 75B is a front view of the projection unit 5600 in the third state. FIG. 76A is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the first state, and FIG. 76B is a rear view of the projection unit 5600 in the second state. 74 and 76 show a state in which the rear base 5611 is removed. Further, since the displacement operation from the first state to the third state is only the displacement operation from the first state to the second state and the displacement direction reversed left and right, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 73 (a) and 74 (a), in the first state in which the projection plate member 5620 is disposed at a substantially central portion on the left and right sides of the central opening 5612h, the rotation disposed on both sides in the left and right directions. The member 5670 is biased by a biasing spring (not shown), and one end side is displaced downward. Accordingly, the second block 654 of the irradiation unit 650 disposed on the rotating member 5670 can be displaced with respect to the first block 653, and the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed on the front surface of the second block 654 can be changed. It can be tilted to the projection plate member 5620 side. As a result, the light of the LED 651 disposed on the front surface of the second block 654 can be made incident from the left and right sides (the left and right sides in FIG. 74A) of the projection plate member 5620, and the projection plate member 5620 correspondingly. The amount of light emitted from the front of the projector can be increased, and the pattern and design of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

  From the state shown in FIGS. 73 (a) and 74 (a), a driving force is applied to the driving motor 661, and the driving force is applied to the rack 5627 via a gear train (gears 662-664, 5665-5668). When slid in the right direction in the front view (right direction in FIG. 73), the projection plate member 5620 coupled to the rack 5627 is similarly slid in the right direction (see FIGS. 73 (b) and 74 (b)). ). Thus, a second state is formed in which the projection plate member 5620 is disposed on the right side in front view with respect to the central opening 5612h.

  In this case, the front cover 5626 disposed on the front surface side of the upper end of the projection plate member 5620 is in contact with the side surface on the other end side of the L-shape of the rotation member 5670 disposed in the sliding direction. Thereby, a rotational moment in a direction in which one end side is pushed upward can be applied to the rotating member 5670 around the axis of the shaft portion 5612k serving as a rotating shaft. Accordingly, since one end side of the rotating member 5670 is pushed upward, the second block 654 disposed on the rotating member 5670 is similarly displaced with respect to the first block 653, and the longitudinal direction of the first block 653 (FIG. 74). (B) Left and right direction) and the longitudinal direction of the second block 654 are displaced to a position where they are substantially on the same straight line.

  As a result, in accordance with the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 is displaced to increase the amount of light incident from the upper end surface of the projection plate member 5620. it can. As a result, the amount of light emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 5620 can be increased, and the pattern and design of the projection plate member 5620 can be clearly displayed.

  Further, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 can be displaced in accordance with the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the amount of light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 5620 can be changed. Can be changed. That is, the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 can be changed. As a result, it is easy to give the player interest.

  Here, when the projection plate member is displaced, the LED disposed at another position is turned on in accordance with the displacement, so that the amount of light of the projection plate member is kept constant. Along with this, it is necessary to control whether the LED is turned on or off. As the displacement of the projection plate member becomes more complicated, the control of the LED becomes more complicated, and the reliability of the product decreases. In addition, there is a problem that the product cost increases because the LED is disposed at another position.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the projection direction of the LED 651 can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the projection plate member 5620. Therefore, the position of the projection plate member 5620 is detected and disposed at another position. Since it is not necessary to control the LED to be turned on or off, the control of the LED 651 can be simplified, the reliability of the product can be improved, and an increase in product cost can be suppressed.

  Moreover, in order to irradiate light to the irradiated body (projection plate member) to be displaced, a plurality of fixed irradiated bodies (LEDs) are arranged around the irradiated body, and the irradiation range of each irradiated body There was a problem that a weak part of the light amount was formed during this period, and when the irradiated object was displaced, light and darkness was produced, which lowered the interest of the player. Here, it is conceivable to solve the above-mentioned problem by narrowing the arrangement interval of the irradiation bodies. However, in this case, the number of the irradiation bodies to be arranged increases, so that the product cost increases. There was a point.

  However, in the fifth embodiment, since the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 can follow the displacement operation of the projection plate member 5620. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 can always be stably projected regardless of the displacement position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the brightness of the light accompanying the displacement of the projection plate member 5620, and to prevent the player's interest from being impaired. Furthermore, since there is no need to increase the number of LEDs 651, it is possible to suppress an increase in product cost.

  Further, as described above, the irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 can be changed by the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, so that the driving force of the drive motor 661 is applied to the projection plate member 5620. The driving for sliding displacement and the driving for rotating the second block 654 can be used together, and it is not necessary to newly provide driving means for displacing the second block 654. As a result, an increase in product cost can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the irradiation unit 650 is formed by the base member 652 formed from an elastically deformable material and the blocks 653 and 654, there is no need to form the second block 654 to be displaced as a separate member. Therefore, after the irradiation unit 650 assembled as a unit is disposed on the front base 5612, the irradiation unit 650 can be disposed on the front base by connecting the wiring, so that the assembly process can be simplified.

  On the other hand, when displacing from the second state to the first state, the rack 5627 is displaced to the center position in the left-right direction of the central opening 5612h by reversing the drive of the drive motor 661. Therefore, the projection plate member 5620 connected to the rack 5627 is similarly slid to form the first state.

  In this case, the rotating member 5670 on the side of which one end is pushed up by the displacement to the second state (left side in FIG. 74 (b)) is projected by an unillustrated urging spring interposed between the front base 5612 and the projection plate. As the member 5620 slides and displaces to the center position in the left-right direction, one end side of the L-shaped front view of the rotating member 5670 is pushed downward and rotated about the shaft portion 5612k. In addition, as described above, the rotation member 5670 displaced downward is brought into contact with the displacement restricting protrusion 5612j, so that the rotation range thereof is restricted.

  The displacement from the first state to the third state shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 8 is only detailed as the displacement operation from the first state to the second state and the displacement direction are reversed left and right as described above. Description is omitted. The third state is a state in which the projection plate member 5620 is disposed on the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the central opening 5612h (see FIGS. 75B and 76B).

  Next, a projection unit 6600 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 80. In the first embodiment, the case where the entire central portion of the projection plate member 620 is always visible from the player has been described. However, in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is partially visible from the player. It is possible to arrange.

  First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each said embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 77 is a front view of a projection unit 6600 in the sixth embodiment. 78 is a front exploded perspective view of the projection unit 6600. FIG. FIG. 79 is a rear view of the front base 6612 in a state where the front base 6612 and the irradiation unit 650 are assembled.

  As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the projection unit 6600 includes a base member 6610 formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and a projection plate member disposed so as to be partially visible from an opening formed in the base member 6610. 6620, an irradiation unit 650 that makes light incident from the outer peripheral surface of the projection plate member 6620, a drive motor 661 for rotating the projection plate member 6620, and a driving force of the drive motor 661 are transmitted to the projection plate member 6620. And a gear train (gears 662 to 664).

  The base member 6610 includes a ring-shaped back base 611 and a ring-shaped front base 6612 disposed in front of the back base 611, and is formed on a face between the back base 611 and the front base 6612. The projection plate member 6620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (662 to 664) are housed in the internal space.

  The front base 6612 is formed with a shield member 6612r having a ring shape when viewed from the front at the inner edge of the ring-shaped front base 612 of the first embodiment, and an opening opening in a fan shape in the front-rear direction in a part of the shield member 6612r. A portion 6612p is formed.

  The opening 6612p is an opening for making the projection plate member 6620 disposed on the back surface visible from the opening, and is formed in a fan shape centered on the axis of the front base 6612 formed in a front view annular shape. The shield member 6612r is formed with a length of about 1/6 of the entire circumference, and is formed on the right side of the front view.

  The irradiation unit 650 is mounted on the rear surface of the front base 6612 and in a region between the intermediate standing portion 612b and the outer standing portion 612c at the outer edge of the opening 6612p. Are stacked between the opposing surfaces (internal space) of both the bases 611 and 612.

  Projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner diameter larger than the inner diameter of annular base surface base 6612. Projection plate member 6620 is disposed coaxially with the axis of front base 6612. Therefore, when the projection unit 6600 is assembled, the inner edge portion of the projection plate member 6620 is disposed so as not to be visually recognized by the player.

  The gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 disposed on the projection plate member 6620 are disposed on the non-display area side of the front base 612 (that is, disposed on the back side of the front base 612 (shielding member 612r)). Therefore, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the appearance can be prevented from deteriorating accordingly.

  Projection plate member 6620 is made of a light-transmitting material, transmits the display of third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back side, and is visually recognized by the player through opening 6612p of front base 6612. In addition, when the light emitted from the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer peripheral surface, the incident light is emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 620 in the form of a pattern or a pattern, and the front base 6612 is formed. The player is made to visually recognize through the opening 6612p. That is, a pattern or a pattern can be raised (displayed) in the internal space of the opening 6612p of the front base 6612.

  In addition, the projection plate member 6620 includes a reflection portion 6622 that diffusely reflects light therein. The reflection portion 6622 is a portion whose interior is roughened by laser processing or the like, and is formed by dividing a plurality of patterns, designs, etc. in the circumferential direction of the projection plate member 6620 over the entire area of the projection plate member 6620 in the front view. The In the present embodiment, the shape of the reflective portion 6622 such as the pattern or symbol is formed by dividing it into six in the circumferential direction, and reflection regions 6622a to 6622f of six patterns or symbols are formed (see FIG. 80). .

  Further, the projection plate member 6620 is provided with a gear member 630 and a groove forming member 640 on the outer peripheral edge portion on the back side and the front side, respectively. Thus, as in the first embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor 661 is transmitted to the gear member 630 via the gear train (662 to 664), whereby the projection plate member 6620 can be rotated.

  Next, the operation of the projection unit 6600 will be described with reference to FIG. 80A to 80C are rear views of the projection unit 6600. FIG. 80A to 80C show the transition state of the projection plate member 6620. Further, FIG. 80 illustrates a state where the rear base 611 is removed. Further, the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 and the reflection part 6622 (reflection areas 6622a to 6622f) of the projection plate member 6620 are shown by chain lines.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (a), in a state where the projection plate member 6620 is disposed at the initial position, the projection plate member 6620 is located inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 in a front view (viewed from the back of the page). A reflective region 6622a is disposed. Therefore, when the light of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is incident from the outer edge portion of the projection plate member 6620, the pattern or design of the reflective region 6622a can be displayed inside the opening 6612p. That is, the player can visually recognize the patterns and symbols that appear inside the opening 6612p.

  In this case, the light of the LED 651 is also applied to the reflection areas 6622b and 6622f adjacent to the reflection area 6622a, but the front base 6612 is disposed in front of the reflection areas 6622b and 6622f. The display of the regions 6622b and 6622f cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, by displaying the pattern or design of the projection plate member 6620 through the opening 6612p, the player does not visually recognize the display other than the display surface, and the player's interest is impaired because other regions can be visually recognized. Can be suppressed.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 80B and 80C, when a driving force is applied to the driving motor 661, the driving force is projected through the gear train (gears 662 to 664) as described above. The projection plate member 6620 is rotated by being transmitted to the plate member. By rotating the projection plate member 6620, the patterns and symbols of the reflection areas 6622a to 6622f arranged inside the opening 6612p of the front base 6612 in the front view are switched. Thereby, a plurality of different patterns and symbols can be displayed inside the opening 6612p.

  Here, when a pattern or a pattern is printed on the front surface of the irradiated body (projection plate member 6620) and the irradiated body is displaced to switch the display surface, the visible area (opening portion) of the irradiated body is switched. 6612p), the pattern or design of the irradiated object can be seen, and the player can know which display will be displayed next before switching the pattern or design, so that the player There was a problem that the displacement could not be enjoyed to the end.

  Even if the power of the light source (LED 651) that irradiates light to the irradiated object is turned off to darken the display surface of the irradiated object, the irradiated object may be affected by the light from other devices or fluorescent lamps in the store. By being irradiated, the pattern and design of the irradiated object can be visually recognized by the player.

  In the present application, the projection plate member 6620 is made of a light-transmitting material, and by turning off the light of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650, it is difficult to visually recognize the pattern and design of the projection plate member 6620, thereby making the transparent state. be able to. Therefore, when the projection plate member 6620 is rotated, by turning off the irradiation of the LED 651, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the pattern and design of the projection plate member 6620. The displacement of 6620 can be enjoyed to the end.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, the projection plate member 6620 is formed in an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is rotated around the center of the projection plate member 6620. The space required for disposing the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while ensuring the number of patterns and symbols to be visually recognized by the player through the opening 6612p of 6612.

  That is, when the projection plate member 6620 slides and displaces, the arrangement space in the left and right or up and down directions is limited, so that it is difficult to secure the number of patterns and figures on the projection plate member 6620. By forming the projection plate member 6620, the space required for disposing the projection plate member 6620 can be suppressed while securing the number of patterns and symbols.

  Next, a projection unit 7600 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 85. In the first embodiment, the case where one projection plate member 620 is disposed has been described, but in the seventh embodiment, a plurality of projection plate members 7620 (three in the seventh embodiment) are disposed. . In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 7600 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 81A is a front view of the projection unit 7600 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 81B is a perspective front view of the projection unit 7600. 82 is an exploded perspective front view of the projection unit 7600, and FIG. 81 (c) is a sectional view of the projection unit 7600 taken along the line LXXXIc-LXXXIc in FIG. 81 (a).

  In the following description, the front side of the paper is the front (front) side and the back side of the paper is the rear (back) side of the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is left (left) ) Side. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing indicate the up-down direction, the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction of the slot machine 10, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, a projection unit 7600 according to the seventh embodiment includes three projection plate members 7620 formed in a plate shape having a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and below the three projection plate members 7620. A lower base member 7680 disposed in the (arrow D direction), an upper base member 7690 disposed above (in the arrow U direction) the three projection plate members 7620, and an inner side of the upper base member 7690. The irradiation unit 650 is provided.

  The projection unit 7600 is positioned in front of the above-described displacement unit 400 (in the direction of arrow F), is fastened and fixed to the outer wall portion 302 of the back case 300, and is disposed on the back case 300. It is arranged in front of 81.

  The projection plate member 7620 is made of a light-transmitting material, and the player can visually recognize the display on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the projection plate member 7620 includes a reflection portion 622 that diffusely reflects light incident on the projection plate member 7620, and when light enters from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 disposed on the upper base member 7690, The incident light can be emitted from the front of the projection plate member 7620 in a form that forms a pattern or a pattern. That is, a pattern or a pattern can be raised (displayed) on the front of the third symbol display device 81.

  The projection plate members 7620 are arranged in a state where three projection plate members 7620 are stacked in the front-rear direction (in the direction of the arrow FB), and the patterns and designs that are raised (displayed) on the respective projection plate members 7620 are directly displayed. Or it can be visually recognized through the projection board member 7620 arrange | positioned ahead.

  In addition, the reflection part 622 formed in the projection plate member 7620 is formed larger on the outer side (vertical and horizontal directions in the front view) as the projection plate member 7620 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) (FIG. 81). (See (c)). In addition, the projection plate members 7620 that are stacked in the front-rear direction are set at different distances between the opposing plates. More specifically, the first projection plate member 7620 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side) and the second projection plate member 7620 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side). An opposing distance X1 (see FIG. 81C) with respect to the second projection plate member 7620 is three on the back side of the second projection plate member 7620 and the second projection plate member 7620. It is set to be greater than the distance X2 between the opposing projection plate members 7620 (see FIG. 81C). Thereby, when the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is switched, the patterns and symbols displayed on the projection plate member 7620 can be made different from each other.

  Therefore, the distance between the patterns and symbols displayed on the projection plate member 7620 can be changed without the reflection unit 622 moving. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the distance between the pattern and the pattern visually recognized by the player. As a result, the player can easily pay attention to the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 7620, and the effect of the display on the projection plate member 7620 can be enhanced.

  Further, a through hole through which a screw for fastening the projection plate member 7620 and the upper base member 7690 is inserted is formed above the projection plate member 7620. Further, a through-hole through which a screw for fastening the projection plate member 7620 and the lower base member 7680 is inserted is formed below the projection plate member 7620 on the front side and the rear side of the three sheets. . Accordingly, the plurality of projection plate members 7620, the upper base member 7690, and the lower base member 7680 are fastened and fixed.

  The lower base member 7680 is formed in a rectangular plate shape when viewed from above, and the length dimension in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) is larger than the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 7620. The length dimension in the front-rear direction is set larger than the width dimension in the front-rear direction of the plurality of projection plate members 7620 overlapping in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the lower base member 7680 is formed with a groove portion 7681 that is recessed downward on the upper surface side. The groove portion 7681 extends in the left-right direction and is provided in parallel in the front-rear direction. Further, the groove portion 7681 is set so that the extension dimension in the left-right direction is substantially the same as the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 7620, and the groove width in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the thickness dimension of the projection plate member 7620. The lower end portion of the projection plate member 7620 is inserted inside the groove portion 7681 and disposed.

  Further, the lower base member 7680 has an outer surface that is black, and is less likely to transmit light inward. As a result, the light that is incident on the projection plate member 7620 from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 and is emitted from the lower end surface of the projection plate member 7620 is reflected on the outer surface of the lower base member 7680 to be above the projection plate member 7620. Can be folded. Therefore, it is possible to easily irradiate the entire area of the projection plate member 7620 with light incident from one end above the projection plate member 7620. As a result, it is possible to easily display a pattern or a pattern displayed on the projection plate member 7620.

  The upper base member 7690 includes an irradiation unit base 7691 fastened and fixed to the projection plate member 7620, and a covering member 7692 disposed above the irradiation unit base 7691.

  One irradiation unit base 7691 is provided above each of the three projection plate members 7620 provided. In addition, the irradiation unit base 7691 includes a first recess 7691a and a second recess 7691b that are provided in the upper and lower portions, and a through hole 7691c that communicates the first recess 7691a and the second recess 7691b.

  The first recess 7691 a is a groove for disposing the irradiation unit 650 on the upper portion of the irradiation unit base 7691, and has an inner edge shape that is substantially the same as or slightly larger than the outer shape of the irradiation unit 650. Therefore, the irradiation unit 650 is disposed in a state in which a part of the irradiation unit 650 is inserted into the first recess 7691a, so that displacement of the irradiation unit 650 with respect to the irradiation unit base 7691 is suppressed.

  The second recess 7691b is a groove for inserting the projection plate member 7620 in order to suppress the displacement of the projection plate member 7620 with respect to the irradiation unit base 7691, and is in the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). The groove width is set to be approximately the same as the plate thickness of the projection plate member 7620 and is set to be substantially the same as the length dimension of the projection plate member 7620 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). Therefore, when the upper end of the projection plate member 7620 is inserted into the second recess 7691b, the movement in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction is restricted with respect to the irradiation unit base 7691.

  The through hole 7691c irradiates the projection plate member 7620 disposed inside the second recess 7691b with light emitted from the LED 651 mounted on the irradiation unit 650 disposed inside the first recess 7691a. And is formed at a position facing the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 disposed in the first recess 7691a. Thereby, the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 can be irradiated to the upper end surface of the projection plate member 7620.

  The covering member 7692 is a plate member that covers the upper side of the irradiation unit 650 disposed in each irradiation unit base 7691, and is approximately the same size as the dimension in which the irradiation unit bases 7691 are arranged in parallel in the front-rear direction. In addition, each irradiation unit base 7691 is fastened and fixed. The covering member 7692 is formed with a groove 7692a for receiving the irradiation unit 650 at a position facing the irradiation unit 650. Therefore, the covering member 7692 is disposed in a state where a part of the irradiation unit 650 is received inside the groove portion 7692a. Thereby, the irradiation unit 650 can suppress a positional shift with respect to the covering member 7692.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83 to FIG. 85, modes of light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 will be described. 83A to 83D are schematic sectional views of the projection unit 7600. FIG. 84 (a) to 85 (b) are front views of the projection unit 7600 partially enlarged.

  83A to 83D correspond to the cross section of the projection unit 7600 shown in FIG. 81C, and only the projection plate member 7620 and the irradiation unit 650 are schematically illustrated. FIG. 84 (a) shows the light emission state (light irradiation state of the LED 651) shown in FIG. 83 (a), FIG. 84 (b) shows the light emission state shown in FIG. 83 (b), and FIG. FIG. 83C corresponds to the light emission state shown in FIG. 83C, and FIG. 85B corresponds to the light emission state shown in FIG. Further, in FIGS. 84 (a) to 85 (b), the outer shape of the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 7620 disposed on the front side is given a pattern A symbol and is indicated by a two-dot chain line. The outer shape of the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 7620 disposed in the middle of the three projection plate members 7620 is shown by a two-dot chain line with a pattern B symbol on the back side. The outer shape of the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 7620 disposed in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 83A and 84A, when the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is irradiated to all the three projection plate members 7620 arranged in parallel (3). When irradiation of light of the irradiation unit 650 provided at each end of each projection plate member 7620 is turned on (turned on), the pattern A, the pattern B, and the pattern on the front side of the projection plate member 7620 C is displayed. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the pattern A, the pattern B, and the pattern C at the same time.

  In the seventh embodiment, the reflecting portion 622 is formed to be as large as the projection plate member 7620 whose outer shape is disposed on the back side. Accordingly, the player can visually recognize the light reflected by the reflection portion 622 of the projection plate member 7620 disposed on the back side from the periphery of the light reflected by the reflection portion 622 of the projection plate member 7620 disposed on the front side. It is possible. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 84A, the pattern B is formed on the outside of the pattern A, and the pattern C is formed on the outside of the pattern B, so that the player can visually recognize them.

  In this case, the distance from the pattern A to the display surface of the pattern C from the front side (player's viewpoint) of the projection unit 7600 is different. Therefore, when the patterns A to C are viewed from the front side (player side), the pattern formed in the human shape can have a depth. As a result, the player can make the display (pattern) of each reflecting portion 622 three-dimensionally visible, and the display of the projection unit 7600 can be interesting.

  Further, as described above, the reflection portion 622 is formed to be as large as the projection plate member 7620 whose outer shape is disposed on the back side. Thereby, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the display of each reflecting portion 622 in a three-dimensional manner. In other words, in the case where the reflecting portions 622 are formed to have the same size, when the player's viewpoint is arranged at a position facing the reflecting portion 622, the reflecting portion 622 is reflected by the reflecting portion 622 of the rear projection plate member 7620. Light overlaps with the light reflected by the reflection portion of the projection plate member 7620 on the front side, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the display of the reflection portion 622 with a depth. On the other hand, the outer shape of the reflection portion 622 is set to be as large as the projection plate member 7620 disposed on the back side, so that even when the player's viewpoint is located at a position facing the reflection portion 622, the rear The pattern (for example, pattern B) can be prevented from being hidden behind the front pattern (pattern A). As a result, it is easy for the player to visually recognize the display of each reflecting portion 622 in a three-dimensional manner.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 83 (b) and 84 (b), the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is disposed on the projection plate member 7620 (on the back side) disposed on the front side and in the middle. Of the two projection plate members 7620 disposed on the front side of the irradiation units 650 respectively disposed at the end portions of the three projection plate members 7620. When the irradiation of the irradiation unit 650 disposed at the end is turned on (lighted), the pattern A and the pattern B are displayed on the front side of the projection plate member 7620. Therefore, the player can view the display of the pattern A and the pattern B at the same time.

  As described above, the distances from the front side of the projection unit 7600 (player's viewpoint) to the display surfaces of the patterns A to C are formed differently. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the pattern A and the pattern B in three dimensions, and the display of the projection unit 7600 can be interesting.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 83 (c) and FIG. 85 (a), light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is projected plate member 7620 (disposed in the middle) disposed on the front side and the back side. 2 projection plates disposed on the front side and the back side of the irradiation units 650 disposed at the end portions of the three projection plate members 7620, respectively. When light irradiation of the irradiation unit 650 disposed at the end of the member 7620 is turned on (lighted), the pattern A and the pattern C are displayed on the front side of the projection plate member 7620. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the display of the pattern A and the pattern C at the same time.

  As described above, the distances from the front side of the projection unit 7600 (player's viewpoint) to the display surfaces of the patterns A to C are formed differently. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the pattern A and the pattern C in three dimensions, and the display of the projection unit 7600 can be interesting. In this case, the distance in the front-rear direction of the pattern A and the pattern C is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the pattern A and the pattern B described above. Therefore, when the 3D display is performed with the pattern A and the pattern C, the depth dimension visually recognized by the player can be made larger than when the 3D display is performed with the pattern A and the pattern B. It can be easily recognized.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 83 (c) and 85 (b), the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is provided on the projection plate member 7620 (on the front side) disposed on the back side and in the middle. Of the two projection plate members 7620 disposed on the back side of the irradiation units 650 respectively disposed at the end portions of the three projection plate members 7620. When the irradiation of the irradiation unit 650 disposed at the end is turned on (lighted), the pattern B and the pattern C are displayed on the front side of the projection plate member 7620. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the display of the pattern B and the pattern C at the same time.

  As described above, the distances from the front side of the projection unit 7600 (player's viewpoint) to the display surfaces of the patterns A to C are formed differently. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the pattern B and the pattern C three-dimensionally, and the display of the projection unit 7600 can be interesting. In this case, the distance between the patterns B and C in the front-rear direction is made smaller than the distance between the patterns A and B in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, when the stereoscopic display is performed with the pattern B and the pattern C, the depth dimension visually recognized by the player can be made smaller than when the stereoscopic display is performed with the pattern A and the pattern B. The depth of the pattern can be reduced.

  Although detailed description is omitted, the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is irradiated to only one of the three light guide plates, and one of the patterns A to C is displayed. You may let them.

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the reflection position of the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 is changed in the front-rear direction (arrow F−) by only the operation of switching the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 to irradiation or non-irradiation (ON or OFF). B direction). Therefore, since the projection unit does not need to include a drive motor or the like for moving the reflecting portion 622, the structure can be simplified correspondingly, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the reliability of the product can be improved.

  Here, conventionally, a light transmissive member that is formed of a light transmissive material and has a plurality of reflective portions arranged in parallel in the front or back direction, and an irradiation surface facing the reflective portion is arranged around the light transmissive member. There is known a gaming machine that includes a plurality of light emitting means provided and reflects light incident from the periphery of the light transmitting member by a plurality of reflecting portions to be emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member. According to this gaming machine, each reflecting portion is provided with a plurality of groups each composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces, and each group has a pattern or a pattern shape. Therefore, the player can recognize the light emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member as a pattern or a pattern. In this case, the light of the plurality of light emitting means incident from the periphery of the light transmitting member is irradiated to both of the two reflection portions, and the light pattern or design emitted from the front of the light transmitting member is reflected at the two locations. It is possible to make the player visually recognize the light reflected from the portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member at different positions.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the pattern or design reflected and displayed on the reflecting portion of the light transmissive member cannot be changed, so that the player pays attention to the pattern or design displayed on the light transmissive member. Hateful. For this reason, there is a problem that it is not possible to enhance the effect produced by the display of the light transmitting member.

  On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, each light reflecting surface reflected by the three reflecting portions 622 formed on each projection plate member 7620 is provided at the end of each projection plate member 7620. By switching the irradiation unit on (lit) and off (dark), the irradiation unit can be changed in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). Therefore, it is possible to change the display mode of patterns and symbols displayed on the projection plate member 7620. As a result, the player can easily pay attention to the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 7620, and the effect of the display on the projection plate member 7620 can be enhanced.

  For example, when the 3D display by the pattern A and the pattern C shown in FIG. 85A is performed (when the depth of the 3D display is large), it can be easily selected as an effect at the time of the big hit of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. ), When the 3D display by the pattern B and the pattern C is performed (when the depth of the 3D display is small), it is difficult to be selected as an effect at the time of the big hit of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, by each 3D display) The expectation of the production is different) In this case, the player can check the display mode displayed on the projection plate member 7620 to determine whether or not it is a big hit variation. Accordingly, it is possible to make the player easily pay attention to the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 7620, and to enhance the effect produced by the display on the projection plate member 7620.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured so that the player can select the depth of the three-dimensional display (distance between the opposing patterns). Each player has different vision, height, seated position, or seated posture. Due to these reasons, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the 3D display. By making the player change the interval between the 2 display surfaces, the player can easily view the 3D display on the 2 display surfaces. be able to.

  Furthermore, in the seventh embodiment, since the reflection position of the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 7620 can be changed in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), the projection plate member can be viewed from the player's viewpoint. The distance to the reflection position (pattern or design display surface) of the light reflected by the reflection portion 622 of 7620 can be changed. Therefore, in the case where the projection plate member 7620 is disposed near the player's viewpoint, the display of the pattern can be made much more visible to the player than when the projection plate member 7620 is disposed far from the player's viewpoint. Accordingly, it is possible to make the player easily pay attention to the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 7620, and to enhance the effect produced by the display on the projection plate member 7620.

  In the seventh embodiment, since one reflection portion 622 is formed on each of the three projection plate members 7620, the light irradiated (incident) on each projection plate member 7620 receives the incident projection plate. It can suppress that it radiate | emits from a division body, before being reflected by the reflection part 622 formed in the member 7620. FIG. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light before being reflected by the reflecting portion 622 from entering and entering the other projection plate member 7620 other than the projection plate member 7620. Therefore, it can suppress that the light irradiated from LED651 of the irradiation unit 650 mixes in the inside of the projection plate member 7620. FIG. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 7620.

  Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the reflection position of the light reflected to the player side is changed by switching the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 on (lit) and off (dark) is described. In the embodiment, the reflection position of the light reflected to the player side can be changed by moving the reflecting portion 622. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 8600 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 and 87. FIG. FIG. 86A is a front view of the projection unit 8600 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 86B is a side view of the projection unit 8600. FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective front view of the projection unit 8600.

  As shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the projection unit 8600 according to the eighth embodiment includes two projection plate members 7620 and a lower portion (in the direction of arrow D) disposed below the two projection plate members 7620. A side base member 8680, an upper base member 8690 disposed above (in the direction of arrow U) the two projection plate members 8620, and an irradiation unit 650 disposed inside the upper base member 8690 are provided.

  The lower base member 8680 is disposed below the two projection plate members 7620, respectively. The lower base member 8680 is formed in a rectangular plate shape when viewed from above, and the length dimension in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) is larger than the length dimension in the left-right direction of the projection plate member 7620. In addition, the length dimension in the front-rear direction is set larger than the plate thickness of the projection plate member 7620. Further, the lower base member 8680 has a groove portion 7681 formed on the upper surface side, and is disposed by inserting the lower end portion of the projection plate member 7620 inside the groove portion 7681.

  Further, the lower base member 7680 is formed with a black outer surface, and is less likely to transmit light inward. Thereby, the light emitted from the lower end surface of the irradiation unit 650 can be reflected on the outer surface of the lower base member 8680 and folded back above the projection plate member 7620. Therefore, it is possible to easily irradiate the entire area of the projection plate member 7620 with light incident from one end above the projection plate member 7620. As a result, it is possible to easily display a pattern or a pattern displayed on the projection plate member 8620.

  The upper base member 8690 includes an irradiation unit base 8691 fastened and fixed to the projection plate member 7620 and a covering member 8682 disposed above the irradiation unit base 8691.

  One irradiation unit base 8691 is provided above each of the two projection plate members 7620. In addition, the irradiation unit base 8691 includes a first recess 7691a and a second recess 7691b that are provided in the upper and lower portions, and a through hole 7691c that communicates the first recess 7691a and the second recess 7691b. Furthermore, a plate-shaped rack 8691 d extending in the front-rear direction is connected to the side end surface on the right side in front view, to the irradiation unit base 8691 disposed above the projection plate member 7620 on the back side.

  The rack 8691d is a member for transmitting driving for moving the projection plate member 7620, and meshes with a gear GY1 connected to a rotation shaft of a driving motor MO1 disposed in a covering member 8692 described later. A rack gear 8691d1 is engraved on the lower side surface of the rack 8691d. As a result, the rotational force of the drive motor MO1 is transmitted to the projection plate member 7620 via the rack 8691d. Therefore, the projection plate member 7620 can be displaced in the front-rear direction (the displacement direction of the rack 8691d) by the driving force of the drive motor MO1.

  In the eighth embodiment, only the projection plate member 7620 disposed on the back side of the two projection plate members 7620 is formed to be displaceable, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the two projection plate members 7620 may be configured to be displaceable in the front-rear direction.

  The covering member 8692 is a plate member that covers the upper side of the irradiation unit 650 and the rack 8691d disposed on each irradiation unit base 8691, and each irradiation unit 650 before and after the projection plate member 7620 is displaced. The size is set such that the rack 8691d can be covered. The covering member 8692 is formed with a screw hole for fastening and fixing the drive motor MO1 and a through hole 8692b for inserting the rotation shaft of the drive motor MO1.

  Next, the movement of the projection plate member 7620 of the projection unit 8600 in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88 (a) to 88 (c) are side views of the projection unit 8600. FIG. 88 (a) to 88 (c) illustrate the state in which the rear projection plate member 7620 moves from the position where it is disposed on the front side to the rear side.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the projection plate member 7620 disposed on the rear side transmits the rotation of the gear GY1 to the rack 8691d by rotating the rotation shaft of the drive motor MO1 and rotating the gear GY1. Is done. As described above, the rack 8691d is connected to the irradiation unit base 8691 on which the projection plate member 7620 is provided. Accordingly, the projection plate member 7620 is moved by rotating the drive motor MO1. As a result, the projection plate member 7620 disposed on the back side can change the distance X3 (see FIG. 88A) between the opposed positions of the projection plate member 7620 disposed on the front side. it can.

  In this case, as described above, the projection plate member 7620 is formed with the reflection portion 622, and the light irradiated from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 is reflected by the reflection portion 622, whereby the incident light is reflected. The light can be emitted from the front surface of the projection plate member 7620 in the form of a pattern or a pattern shape. Therefore, the distance between the reflection positions of the light reflected by the reflecting portions 622 of the two projection plate members 7620 can be changed by changing the distance X3 between the two projection plate members 7620 facing each other. .

  For example, when the position shown in FIG. 88A is used as the reference position of the projection plate member 7620 and the projection plate member 7620 is displaced to the position shown in FIG. 88C, the position is displayed on the projection plate member 7620 at the reference position. In the pattern or pattern mode, the pachinko machine 10 is set so that it is difficult to be selected at the time of jackpot of the pachinko machine 10, and in the pattern or pattern mode displayed on the projection plate member 7620 at the position shown in FIG. By making an effect that is easy to select at times, the player can make a standard for determining whether or not to make a big hit by visually recognizing the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 7620. Therefore, the player can easily attract attention to the projection plate member 7620. As a result, the effect of the projection plate member 7620 can be enhanced.

  Note that the reference position of the projection plate member 7620 may be anywhere, and the expectation of jackpot can be increased by displacing it to the position shown in FIG. 88 (a) or 88 (c) as the intermediate position shown in FIG. 88 (b). It may be made small or large.

  Next, a projection unit 9600 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the projection plate member 7620 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the projection unit 8600 is slid in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) has been described. In the ninth embodiment, the projection plate member 7620 of the projection unit 9600 is partially moved. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90, the overall configuration of the projection unit 9600 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective front view of the projection unit 9600 according to the ninth embodiment, FIG. 90 (a) is a front view of the projection unit 9600, and FIG. 90 (b) is an XCb of FIG. 90 (a). It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the projection unit 9600 in the -XCb line. In FIG. 89, only the projection plate member 7620 disposed on the back side of the two projection plate members 7620 disposed in the projection unit 9600 and the member attached to the projection plate member are illustrated. The

  As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the projection unit 9600 according to the ninth embodiment includes two projection plate members 7620, and a lower portion (in the direction of arrow D) disposed below the two projection plate members 7620. A side base member 8680, an upper base member 9690 disposed above (in the direction of arrow U) the two projection plate members 8680, and an irradiation unit 650 disposed inside the upper base member 8690 are provided.

  The upper base member 9690 mainly includes an irradiation unit base 9691 fastened and fixed to the projection plate member 7620, and a covering member 9692 disposed above the irradiation unit base 9691.

  One irradiation unit base 9691 is provided above each of the two projection plate members 7620. The irradiation unit base 9691 disposed above the projection plate member 7620 disposed on the front side of the two projection plate members 7620 is substantially the same as the irradiation unit base 8691 of the above-described eighth embodiment. It is formed into a shape.

  The irradiation unit base 9691 disposed above the projection plate member 7620 disposed on the back side of the two projection plate members 7620 has a bulging portion 9691e that bulges to the front side (arrow F direction side). Is formed.

  The bulging portion 9691e is formed with a through hole 9691e1 penetrating in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), and a shaft member 9691f described later is inserted into the through hole 9691e1 to suspend the irradiation unit base 9691. Established.

  On both sides of the irradiation unit base 9691 on the back side in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction), racks 9691d that are slidable on the covering member 9692 are disposed. The rack 9691d is a member for transmitting a drive for moving the projection plate member 7620, and a rack gear 8691d1 meshing with a gear GY1 connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor MO1 disposed on the covering member 9692. Is engraved on the lower side surface of the rack 9691d. Thereby, the rack 9691d is moved in the front-rear direction by rotating the drive motor MO1.

  Further, the rack 9691d includes an opening 9691d2 penetrating in the left-right direction, and a fastening hole 9691d3 penetrating from the upper side surface of the rack 9691d to the opening 9691d2 side. The opening 9691d2 is a portion into which a rod-shaped shaft member 9691f, which will be described later, is inserted, and is formed to have a size that can hold the holding portion 9691f1 formed at the outer end of the shaft member 9691f on the inside. The fastening hole 9691d3 is communicated with a holding hole 9691f2 penetrating vertically in the holding portion 9691f1 of the shaft member 9691f held in the opening 9691d2. Accordingly, a screw is inserted into the fastening hole 9691d3 from above, the screw is inserted into the holding hole 9691f2, and the shaft member 9691f is fastened and fixed to the fastening hole of the screw formed inside the opening 9691d2. It can arrange | position in the state which can be rotated with respect to it.

  As described above, the shaft member 9691f includes the holding portion 9691f1 that is held by the rack 9691d, and the shaft member 9691f3 that protrudes in a columnar shape from the outer peripheral surface of the holding portion 9691f1 to the projection plate member 7620 side.

  The shaft member 9691f3 is a portion that is inserted into the through hole 9691e1 of the irradiation unit base 9691, and has an outer diameter set smaller than an inner diameter of the through hole 9691e1. In addition, the shaft member 9691f3 of the shaft member 9691f disposed on the left and right sides of the projection plate member 7620 has an annular tip at one side (the shaft member 9691f disposed on the left side) and the other side ( A cylindrical projection having a smaller outer diameter than that of the shaft member 9691f3 is formed at the tip of the shaft member 9691f) disposed on the right side, and the projection portion on the other side is inserted into the annular portion on one side inside the through hole 9691e1. (See FIG. 90 (b)). Thereby, when the projection plate member 7620 is suspended by the shaft member 9691f, the shaft member 9691f can be prevented from being bent at the center position.

  Next, with reference to B06, the movement of the projection plate member 7620 disposed on the back side of the projection unit 9600 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIGS. 91A to 91C are top views of the projection unit 9600. FIG. 91A to 91C, the rack 9691d arranged on the left and right of the projection plate member 7620 is moved in different front-rear directions with FIG. 91B as the reference position. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 91B, when the racks 9691d arranged on the left and right of the projection plate member 7620 are arranged at the same position in the front-rear direction, the front surface of the projection plate member 7620 is parallel to the left-right direction. It is arranged in a state. In this case, the front surface of the rear projection plate member 7620 is arranged in parallel with the front surface of the front projection plate member 7620 disposed in front. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the pattern displayed on the projection plate member 7620 on the front side and the pattern displayed on the projection plate member 7620 on the back side in parallel.

  Further, at the reference position, the left and right racks 9691d are arranged at approximately the daytime position of the displacement region in the front-rear direction, and are predetermined between the projection plate member 7620 disposed on the back side and the projection plate member 7620 on the front side. A gap is formed. Thus, the pattern displayed on the front side is displayed to the player by making the pattern displayed on the projection plate member 7620 on the front side and the pattern displayed on the projection plate member 7620 on the back side together. It can be viewed in three dimensions (with depth).

  As shown in FIG. 91 (a), the rack 9691d disposed on the left side of the projection plate member 7620 from the reference position in FIG. 91 (b) is displaced rearward (in the direction of arrow B), and on the right side of the projection plate member 7620. When the arranged rack 9691d is displaced forward (in the direction of arrow F), the front surface of the projection plate member 7620 suspended from the shaft member 9691f3 is rearward (in the direction of arrow B) toward the left side (in the direction of arrow L). It is in a state where it is arranged to be inclined. In this case, the front surface of the projection plate member 7620 on the rear side is not parallel to the front surface of the projection plate member 7620 disposed on the front side. Accordingly, the player can visually recognize the pattern displayed on the projection plate member 7620 on the front side and the pattern displayed on the projection plate member 7620 on the back side in a non-parallel state. A detailed description of the pattern displayed on the projection plate member 7620 will be given later.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 91 (c), the rack 9691d disposed on the left side of the projection plate member 7620 is displaced forward (in the direction of arrow F) from the reference position in FIG. When the rack 9691d disposed on the right side is displaced rearward (arrow B direction), the front surface of the projection plate member 7620 suspended from the shaft member 9691f3 is rearward (arrow B) toward the right side (arrow R direction). It is set in a state of being inclined in the direction). In this case, the front surface of the projection plate member 7620 on the rear side is not parallel to the front surface of the projection plate member 7620 disposed on the front side. Accordingly, the player can visually recognize the pattern displayed on the projection plate member 7620 on the front side and the pattern displayed on the projection plate member 7620 on the back side in a non-parallel state. A detailed description of the pattern displayed on the projection plate member 7620 will be given later.

  Next, a pattern displayed on the projection plate member 7620 when the rear projection plate member 7620 moves will be described with reference to FIG. 92A and 92C are schematic views of the projection unit 9600 as viewed from above. 92 (b) and 92 (d) are front views of the projection unit 9600. FIG. 92 (a) and 92 (b), the state in which the projection plate member 7620 is moved to the position shown in FIG. 91 (a) is shown in FIGS. 92 (c) and 92 (d). The state where the projection plate member 7620 is moved to the position shown in FIG. 92 (b) and 92 (d), the pattern displayed on the projection plate member 7620 on the front side is the sign of the pattern D, and the pattern displayed on the projection plate member 7620 on the back side is the pattern E. Each is indicated by a two-dot chain line with a reference numeral.

  As shown in FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (b), when the front surface of the projection plate member 7620 on the back side is arranged to be inclined rearward (arrow B direction) toward the left side (arrow L direction), The space between the left facing portions of each projection plate member 7620 is made larger than the space between the right facing portions. Thus, when the pattern D and the pattern E displayed on each projection plate member 7620 are viewed from the player side, only the left side portion of the pattern D and the pattern E is displayed in a three-dimensional manner (with a depth). can do.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 92 (c) and FIG. 92 (d), the front surface of the projection plate member 7620 on the rear side is disposed to be inclined rearward (arrow B direction) toward the right side (arrow R direction). And the right side of each projection plate member 7620. It is made larger than between the left side. Thereby, when the pattern D and the pattern E displayed on each projection board member 7620 are visually recognized from the player side, only the right part of the pattern D and the pattern E can be displayed in three dimensions.

  According to this, for example, the projection plate member 7620 on the back side is changed from the state shown in FIG. 92B to the state shown in FIG. 92D while displaying the pattern D and the pattern E on each projection plate member 7620. By displacing, a movement can be given to the three-dimensional display of the pattern D and the pattern E visually recognized by the player.

  That is, the rear projection plate member 7620 is orthogonal to the front projection plate member 7620 in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the projection plate members 7620 are juxtaposed) (in the ninth embodiment, the direction of the arrow UD). Of the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 7620 on the back side and the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 7620 on the front side. Since the distance from the reflection position is partially different, variations in display patterns and patterns displayed on the projection plate member 7620 and viewed by the player can be increased. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the patterns and symbols displayed on the projection plate member 7620, and to enhance the effect produced by the display on the projection plate member 7620.

  Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the eighth embodiment, the projection plate member 7620 disposed on the back side is slid in the front-rear direction, so that the light reflected between the reflection portions 622 of the projection plate members 7620 is reflected between the reflection positions. In the tenth embodiment, the case where the projection plate member 10620 is rotationally displaced will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 10600 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 93A is a front view of the projection unit 10600 according to the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 93B is a cross-sectional view of the projection unit 10600 taken along line XCIIIb-XCIIIb in FIG. 93A. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective front view of the projection unit 10600. FIG. In FIGS. 93 and 94, the rotation axis of the projection unit 10600 is indicated by a two-dot chain line with the axis O attached thereto.

  93 and 94, a projection unit 10600 according to the tenth embodiment includes a first unit 10600A formed in a cylindrical shape and a second unit formed in a cylindrical shape and disposed inside the first unit 10600A. It is comprised with unit 10600B.

  The first unit 10600A includes an annular unit 10601A formed on a circular ring from four curved plates, an upper base 10690A and a lower disk body 10603A disposed at both axial ends of the annular unit 10601A. Formed from. Further, the first unit 10600A is arranged in a state where the axial direction of the annular unit 10601A is parallel to the gravity direction (arrow UD direction), and the upper base 10690A is disposed below the annular unit 10601A in the gravity direction. A base 10680A is disposed below the annular unit 10601A in the direction of gravity.

  The annular unit 10601A is formed by combining four curved plate members having substantially the same length in the circumferential direction, and includes two projection plate members 10620A made of a light-transmitting material, Two base members 10610A made of a permeable material are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction.

  The two projection plate members 10620A are arranged at positions facing each other with the axis of the annular unit 10601A sandwiched therebetween, and each is arranged in parallel in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). The display on the third symbol display device 81 is visible to the player. In addition, the two projection plate members 10620A include a reflection unit 622 that diffuses light incident on the projection plate member 10620A, and is disposed in an irradiation unit 10650 disposed in a base member 10610A described later. When light is incident from the LED 651, the incident light can be emitted from the radial side surface of the projection plate member 10620 in a state of a pattern or a pattern. That is, the two projection plate members 10620A can float (display) a pattern or a symbol on the front surface of the third symbol display device 81 when the projection plate members 10620A are juxtaposed in the front-rear direction. The patterns and symbols displayed on the two projection plate members 10620A may be the same display or different displays.

  The two base members 10610A are disposed at positions facing each other with the axis of the annular unit 10601A interposed therebetween, and are formed to have substantially the same radius as the radius of the two projection plate members 10620 described above. In addition, the two projection plate members 10620 are arranged side by side in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the two projection plate members 10620 are arranged. As described above, since the base member 10610A is formed of a non-permeable member, the inside of the annular unit 10601A can be darkened, and the player can visually recognize the pattern and design displayed on the projection plate member 10620A. It can be made easier.

  Further, the two base members 10610A are provided with an opening 10613A that is recessed on both sides in the circumferential direction (the contact surface with the projection plate member 10620A), and a recess that is recessed on the side surface on the radially inner side. A concave portion 10614A that is communicated is formed, and an irradiation unit 10650 that is disposed with the irradiation surface facing the projection plate member 10620A is inserted into the concave portion 10614A and is emitted from the irradiation unit 10650. The projected plate member 10620A is irradiated with the emitted light through the opening 10613A.

  The upper base 10690A includes a disc body 10663A formed in a disc shape, and a shaft portion 10694A which is formed in an annular shape, is positioned coaxially with the axis of the disc body 10663A and projects from the outer peripheral surface of the disc body 10893A. Prepare.

  The disc body 10663A is formed to have the same outer diameter as the above-described outer diameter of the annular unit 10601A, and is disposed at the end of the annular unit 10601A on the upper side in the gravity direction (arrow U direction side). In addition, a projection plate member 10620A and a base member 10610A that constitute the annular unit 10601A are fastened to the disc body 10663A, whereby the annular unit 10601A can be configured as an integral unit.

  The shaft portion 10694A is a member that supports the first unit 10600A in a rotatable state, and is inserted into a support portion (not shown) recessed in the center frame 86 of the game board 13 on which the projection unit 10600 is disposed. The Thus, the first unit 10600A can be rotated by driving the drive motor MO3. Further, the inner edge of the shaft portion 10694A is connected to a through-hole penetrating the shaft portion of the disc body 10663A, and the internal space of the annular unit 10601A communicates with the external space through the internal space of the shaft portion 10694A. Furthermore, a shaft portion 10694B of the second unit 10600B described later is inserted into the internal space of the shaft portion 10694A.

  The lower base 10680A includes a disc body 10683A formed in a disc shape, an annular portion 10684A formed in an annular shape, positioned coaxially with the axis of the disc body 10683A and projecting from the outer peripheral surface of the disc body 10683A. The annular portion 10684A includes an annular rack 10485A that is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the projecting tip of the annular portion 10684A in the circumferential direction.

  The disc body 10683A is formed to have the same outer diameter as the above-described outer diameter of the annular unit 10601A, and is disposed at the lower end of the annular unit 10601A in the gravity direction (arrow D direction side). In addition, a projection plate member 10620A and a base member 10610A that constitute the annular unit 10601A are fastened to the disc body 10663A, whereby the annular unit 10601A can be configured as an integral unit together with the upper base 690A.

  The annular portion 10684A is connected to a through hole whose inner edge penetrates the shaft portion of the disc body 10683A, and the internal space of the annular unit 10601A communicates with the external space via the internal space of the annular portion 10684A. The Furthermore, the annular portion 10684B of the second unit 10600B described later is inserted into the internal space of the annular portion 10684A.

  The annular rack 10485A is meshed with a gear GY3 connected to the rotation shaft of the driving motor MO3 that applies a driving force to the annular unit 10601A. As a result, when the rotation shaft of the drive motor MO3 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted from the gear GY3 to the annular rack 10485A, and the annular unit 10601A is rotated around the axis. Thereby, the projection plate member 10620A constituting the annular unit 10601A can be moved.

  In this case, since the annular unit 10601A is formed in an annular shape, the display of the projection plate member 10620 can be maximized, and the displacement region when the projection plate member 10620 rotates can be minimized. it can. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 10620 and to arrange other members close to the projection plate member 10620 (annular unit).

  The configuration of the second unit 10600B is almost the same as that of the first unit 10600A. The reference numeral A of the first unit 10600A is changed to B, and the detailed description thereof is omitted. The second unit 10600B is formed such that the outer diameter of the annular unit 10601B is smaller than the inner diameter of the annular unit 10601A of the first unit 10600A, and is disposed inside the first unit 10600A.

  Further, the shaft portion 10694B of the upper base 10690 of the second unit 10600B is formed to have an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft portion 10694A of the first unit 10600A, and is supported on the inner side of the shaft portion 10694A. Accordingly, the second unit 10600B can be rotated by the rotation of the drive motor MO4. Further, the projecting dimension in the axial direction of the annular part 10684B of the second unit 10600B is set larger than the projecting dimension in the axial direction of the annular part 10684A of the first unit 10600A, and the first unit 10600A. Is projected from the projecting end of the second unit 10600B downward in the direction of gravity. Accordingly, the gear GY4 of the drive motor MO4 disposed outside the first unit 10600A can be engaged with the annular rack 0685B.

  According to the projection unit 10600 configured as described above, the first unit 10600A drives the drive motor MO3 to rotate the first unit 10600A by 180 degrees, thereby bringing the first unit 10600A to the first rotation position on the front side before driving. The arranged projection plate member 10620A can be rotated to the second rotation position on the back side. Further, the projection plate member 10620A disposed on the back side before driving can be rotated to the front side position. Furthermore, the base member 10610A can be disposed on the front side by rotating the first unit 10600A by approximately 90 degrees from the first rotation position or the second rotation position. This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the inside of the first unit 10600A.

  On the other hand, the second unit 10600B drives the drive motor MO4 to rotate the first unit 10600A by 180 degrees, so that the projection plate member 10620B arranged at the first rotation position on the front side before driving can be moved to the rear side. It can be rotated to the second rotational position. Further, the projection plate member 10620B disposed on the back side before driving can be rotated to the front side position. Furthermore, the base member 10610B can be disposed on the front side by rotating the second unit 10600B by approximately 90 degrees from the first rotation position or the second rotation position. Thus, when the first unit 10600A is set to the first rotation position or the second rotation position, the player can visually recognize the projection plate member 10620 of the first unit 10600A, and the inside of the second unit 10600B. It can be visually recognized. Therefore, a plurality of patterns and graphic forms displayed on the projection plate member 10620A and the projection plate member 10620B can be formed, and the effect of the projection plate member 10620 can be enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a display mode of the projection plate member 10620 will be described. FIG. 95A to FIG. 95D are schematic views of the projection plate member 10620. In FIGS. 95 (a) to 95 (d), only one of the projection plate members 10620A and 10620B disposed in each of the first unit 10600A and the second unit 10600B is shown. 95A to 95D show a state in which the projection plate members 10620A and 10620B are rotationally arranged at different positions. Further, in FIGS. 95 (a) to 95 (d), the pattern F is displayed on the display surface of the projection plate member 10620A, and the pattern displayed on the display surface of the projection plate member 10620B is the pattern G. Each is denoted by a two-dot chain line with a reference numeral.

  In the tenth embodiment, the outer shapes of the pattern F and the pattern G are formed in a human shape. Further, the reflection portion 622 is formed so that the projection plate member 10620B disposed in the second unit 10600B is larger than the projection plate member 10620B disposed in the first unit 10600A.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (a), the projection plate member 10620A disposed in the first unit 10600A and the projection plate member 10620B disposed in the second unit 10600B are respectively disposed at the first rotation position on the front side. In this case, the projection plate member 10620A and the projection plate member 10620B have a predetermined gap X4 (see FIG. 95A) in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the pattern F and the pattern G displayed on the projection plate member 10620A and the projection plate member 10620B can have a depth. As a result, the player can make the display (pattern) of the reflecting portion 622 three-dimensionally visible, and the display of the projection unit 10600 can be interesting.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), the projection plate member 10620A disposed in the first unit 10600A is disposed at the first rotation position on the front side, and the projection plate member disposed in the second unit 10600B. When 10620B is disposed at the second rotational position on the back side, the projection plate member 10620A and the projection plate member 10620B include a gap X5 (see FIG. 95B) larger than the gap X4 described above in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the depth of the pattern F and the pattern G can be made larger than the state shown in FIG. In this case, the slightly large pattern F is visually recognized as small from the player side as it moves to the back side. Therefore, when the pattern F and the pattern G are viewed from the front, the gap between them is made smaller than the state shown in FIG. Accordingly, since the player can visually recognize the pattern different from the pattern displayed in FIG. 95A, the player can be interested in the display of the projection unit 10600.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (c), the projection plate member 10620A disposed in the first unit 10600A is disposed at the second rotational position on the back side, and the projection plate member disposed in the second unit 10600B. When 10620B is arranged at the first rotation position on the front side, the projection plate member 10620A and the projection plate member 10620B include a gap X5 in the front-rear direction. In FIG. 95 (c), unlike FIG. 95 (b), the projection plate member 10620 of the second unit 10600B is disposed on the front side. Since the pattern F is formed smaller than the pattern G and disposed at a position away from the player side, when the pattern F and the pattern G are viewed from the front, the gap is as shown in FIG. ) Is visually recognized larger than the position shown in FIG. Accordingly, since the player can visually recognize the pattern different from the pattern displayed in FIG. 95A, the player can be interested in the display of the projection unit 10600.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (d), the projection plate member 10620A disposed in the first unit 10600A and the projection plate member 10620B disposed in the second unit 10600B are respectively in the second rotational position on the back side. When arranged, the projection plate member 10620A and the projection plate member 10620B are provided with a predetermined gap X4 (see FIG. 95A) in the front-rear direction. In FIG. 95 (d), unlike FIG. 93 (a), the projection plate members 10620A and 10620B of the first unit 10600A and the second unit 10600B are arranged at positions away from the player. Therefore, the pattern F and the pattern G are visually recognized smaller than the position shown in FIG. Accordingly, since the player can visually recognize the pattern different from the pattern displayed in FIG. 95A, the player can be interested in the display of the projection unit 10600.

  That is, by rotating and changing the positions of the projection plate member 10620A and the projection plate member 10620B, the front-rear gap between the projection plate member 10620A and the projection plate member 10620B can be changed, and the arrangement of both in the front-rear direction can be changed. Can do. Therefore, a plurality of displays can be performed by changing the patterns F and G displayed on the projection plate member 10620A and the projection plate member 10620B. As a result, the effect of the projection unit 10600 can be enhanced.

  Next, a projection unit 11600 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 to 99. In the first embodiment, the case where one projection plate member 600 is disposed has been described, but in the eleventh embodiment, a plurality of projection plate members 11620 (two in the eleventh embodiment) are disposed. A description will be given of the case. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the part same as said each embodiment, and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, the overall configuration of the projection unit 11600 in the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98. 96 (a) and 96 (b) are front views of the projection unit 11600 in the eleventh embodiment. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective front view of the projection unit 11600. 98A is a cross-sectional view taken along line XCVIIIa-XCVIIIa in FIG. 96B, and FIG. 98B is a cross-sectional view taken along line XCVIIIb-XCVIIIb in FIG. 96B. 96 (b) shows a state where the front base 11611 is removed, and FIGS. 98 (a) and 98 (b) show a section where the front base 11611 is attached.

  As shown in FIGS. 96 to 98, the projection unit 11600 includes a base member 11610 having an annular shape in front view disposed on the front surface of the displacement unit 400, and disks arranged in parallel on the inner peripheral side of the base member 11610. Two projection plate members 620, a plurality of irradiation units 650 that allow light to enter from the outer peripheral surfaces of the two projection plate members 11620, and two drives for rotating the two projection plate members 11620 A motor 661 and a gear GY5 for transmitting the driving force of the driving motor 661 to the projection plate member 11620 are provided.

  The projection plate member 11620 is made of a light-transmitting material, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized by the player. When light is incident from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650, the incident light In a form that forms a pattern or a pattern, the left turn is emitted from the front of the projection plate member 11620. That is, a pattern or a pattern can be raised (displayed) on the front of the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, conventionally, a target member that includes a target member that is formed of a light-transmitting material and has a reflecting portion, and a light irradiation unit that is disposed around the target member with the irradiation surface facing the target member. There is known a gaming machine in which light incident from the side end face is reflected by a reflecting portion and emitted from the front of a target member. According to this gaming machine, the reflecting portion is provided with a plurality of groups each composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces, and each group forms a pattern or a pattern. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the front of the target member as a pattern or a pattern. Further, according to this gaming machine, two target members are arranged, and a plurality of light irradiation means are arranged around the target member, and one corresponding one of the two target members is provided by one light irradiation means. It arrange | positions in the state which can irradiate light only to an object member. Thereby, a pattern and a pattern can be displayed on both of two object members, and a player can visually recognize it.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in order to display a pattern or a pattern on two target members, it is necessary to provide light irradiation means for irradiating light to the corresponding target members. For this reason, there is a problem that a space for arranging the light irradiation means increases.

  On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, the light of the irradiation unit 650 (LED 651) is incident from the side end face of the two projection plate members 11620 provided, and therefore the light of one irradiation unit 650 (LED 651) is used. The light can be incident on the side end surfaces of the two projection plate members 11620 and a pattern or a pattern can be displayed on the two projection plate members 11620. Therefore, there is no need to provide an irradiation unit 650 corresponding to each of the two projection plate members (irradiating light). Therefore, the number of the irradiation units 650 can be reduced, and an increase in the space for arranging the irradiation units 650 can be suppressed accordingly.

  Further, the irradiation unit 650 is disposed between two light transmission members 11620 arranged in parallel. Thereby, it can suppress that the irradiation unit 650 protrudes in the parallel arrangement direction (arrow FB direction) of the two light transmissive members 11620. Thereby, it can suppress that the external shape of the front-back direction (arrow FB direction) of the projection unit 11600 becomes large, and can arrange | position the projection unit 11600 easily.

  In this case, similarly to the first embodiment 600, the projection unit 11600 employs a structure that increases the efficiency of incidence of light emitted from the LED 651 on the projection plate member 11620, and light emitted from the front of the projection plate member 620. Can be strengthened (patterns and designs can be clearly revealed). Details of these structures will be described later.

  The base member 11610 is disposed between an annular rear surface base 11612, an annular front surface base 11611 disposed in front of the rear surface base 11612, and the opposing surfaces of the rear surface base 11612 and the front base 11611. And an intermediate base 11613 having an annular shape.

  The front base 11611 includes a front portion 11611a formed on an annular plate having a predetermined thickness in the axial direction, and an outer wall portion 11611b erected toward the back base 11612 along the outer edge of the front portion 11611a. And an inner wall portion 11611c erected toward the back base 11612 side along the inner edge of the front portion 11611a, and an annular front side holding portion 11611d disposed on the inner side surface of the outer wall portion 11611b. Composed.

  The front portion 11611a includes a through-hole 11611a1 penetrating in the plate thickness direction, and a shaft support portion 11611a2 that is formed in a columnar shape on the back base 11612 side and is formed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. The through hole 11611a1 is an opening for inserting the gear GY5 of the drive motor 661, and has an inner diameter larger than the outer shape of the gear GY5. A collar C that guides the rotation of the projection plate member 11620 is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 11611a2 in a rotatable state.

  The outer wall 11611b is provided with a front side holding portion 11611d and an intermediate base 11613 on the inner surface thereof. A screw hole for fastening and fixing the front side holding part 11611d and the intermediate base 11613 with screws is formed through the outer wall part 11611b, and the front side holding part 11611d and the intermediate base 11613 are fastened and fixed with screws through the screw holes. Is done.

  The inner wall portion 11611 c is a cover for reducing the gap between the projection plate member 11620 and the projecting tip end surface thereof is disposed in front of the projection plate member 11620. Thereby, it is possible to suppress an unauthorized member (for example, a wire) from being inserted between the inner wall portion 11611c and the projection plate member 11620 and thereby performing a player's fraud.

  The front-side holding portion 11611d is a member that positions the irradiation unit 650 on the front side when the irradiation unit 650 is disposed between the front base 11611 and the rear base 11612. It can suppress that the irradiation unit 650 arrange | positioned between the bases 11612 is located in a front side. Further, the front-side holding portion 11611d is formed of a non-permeable material, and an inclined surface 11611d1 that is inclined inward as the inner peripheral side surface thereof is separated from the irradiation unit 650 to the front side is formed. Thereby, it is possible to easily collect the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 on the side end face of the projection plate member 11620 disposed on the front side.

  The back surface base 11612 includes a back surface portion 11612a formed in an annular plate shape having a predetermined thickness in the axial direction, and an outer wall portion erected toward the front base 11611 along the outer edge of the back surface portion 11612a. 11612b, an inner wall portion 11612c erected toward the front base 11611 side along the inner edge of the rear surface portion 11612a, and an annular rear surface side holding portion 11612d disposed on the inner surface of the outer wall portion 11612b. Composed.

  The rear portion 11612a is formed so that the outer diameter thereof is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the front portion 11611a described above, and is arranged coaxially with the axis of the front portion 11611a. Further, the back surface portion 11612a includes a through hole 11612a1 penetrating in the plate thickness direction, and a shaft support portion 11612a2 that protrudes in a columnar shape on the front base 11611 side and is formed at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. The through-hole 11612a1 is an opening for inserting the gear GY5 of the drive motor 661 for driving the rear projection plate member 11620, and is formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the gear GY5. A collar C that guides the rotation of the projection plate member 11620 is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion 11611a2 in a rotatable state.

  The outer wall 11612b is provided with a back surface holding portion 11612d on the inner surface thereof. A screw hole for fastening and fixing the front side holding portion 11611d with a screw is formed through the outer wall portion 11612b, and the back side holding portion 11612d is fastened and fixed with a screw through the screw hole.

  The inner wall portion 11612 c is a cover for reducing a gap between the projection plate member 11620 and the projecting tip end surface thereof is disposed behind the side surface of the projection plate member 11620. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an illegal member (for example, a wire) from being inserted between the inner wall portion 11612c and the projection plate member 11620 and thereby performing an illegal player.

  The rear-side holding part 11612d is a member that positions the irradiation unit 650 on the rear side when the irradiation unit 650 is disposed between the front base 11611 and the rear base 11612. It is possible to prevent the irradiation unit 650 disposed between the base 11612 and the rear surface side from being displaced. As described above, the forward displacement of the irradiation unit 650 is regulated by the front side holding portion 11611d. Therefore, the irradiation unit 650 is disposed between the front side holding portion 11611d and the back side holding portion 11612d facing each other, so that the positional deviation thereof is regulated.

  In addition, the back side holding portion 11612d is formed of a non-permeable material, and an inclined surface 11612d1 that is inclined inward as the inner peripheral side surface thereof is separated from the irradiation unit 650 toward the back side is formed. Accordingly, it is possible to easily collect the light emitted from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 on the side end surface of the projection plate member 11620 disposed on the back side.

  In the projection plate member 11620, an outer edge member 11625 formed in an annular shape along the outer peripheral edge of the projection plate member 11620 is disposed on the side surface on the outer side in the opposing direction of the two projection plate members 11620. The outer edge member 11625 is formed of a light transmissive material, and includes an annular rack 11625a engraved on the outer peripheral surface and a guide groove 11625b recessed on the inner peripheral surface.

  Thus, light can be incident on the inside of the projection plate member 11620 using the outer edge member 11625. That is, the outer edge member 11625 can enlarge the area of the incident surface where the light emitted from the LED 651 of the lighting unit 650 enters the projection plate member 11620. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the display of patterns and symbols displayed on the projection plate member 11620.

  Further, since the outer edge member 11625 is disposed on the outer side surface in the opposing direction of the two projection plate members 11620, the outer edge members 11625 disposed on the two projection plate members 11620 interfere with each other. Can be suppressed. Therefore, the gap between the two projection plate members 11620 facing each other can be reduced, and the light emitted from one LED 651 can be easily incident on the two projection plate members 11620. As a result, the external shape of the projection unit 11600 in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) can be reduced, and the pattern and symbols displayed on the projection plate member 11620 can be easily seen by the player.

  The annular rack 11625a is meshed with a gear GY5 connected to the rotation shaft of the drive motor 661. Thus, when the drive motor 661 is driven, the driving force is transmitted from the gear GY5 to the annular rack 11625a. Thus, the projection plate member 11620 is rotated.

  In the guide groove 11625b, the outer edge portion of the collar C is inserted, whereby the rotation of the projection plate member 11620 is guided, and the projection plate member 11620 can be prevented from being displaced in the axial direction and the radial direction. . The side surface of the guide groove 11625b is partially cut away, and the outer edge of the collar C is inserted into the guide groove 11625b from the cutout portion.

  Accordingly, the outer edge member 11625 that can easily make the light of the LED 651 incident on the projection plate member 11620 is formed with a drive transmission portion for rotating the projection plate member 11620 and a guide portion for guiding the rotation. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved with the simplification of the structure.

  Further, since the annular rack 11625a and the guide groove 11625b are respectively formed on the opposing surfaces of the outer edge member 11625, it is possible to suppress the rigidity of the outer edge member 11625 from being partially reduced. As a result, the rigidity of the outer edge member 11625 can be secured, and damage to the outer edge member 11625 can be suppressed.

  The intermediate base 11613 is formed from a non-permeable material and is formed from a plate member having an annular shape when viewed from the front. The intermediate base 11613 is formed with protruding portions 11613a protruding radially outward from the outer peripheral surface thereof at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, six places are formed in the circumferential direction.

  The projecting portion 11613a is a portion that comes into contact with the inner side surface of the outer wall portion 11611b of the front base 11611 when the intermediate base 11613 is fastened to the front base 11611. The inner diameter of the outer wall portion 11611b and the outer diameter of the projecting portion 11613a are substantially the same. Set the same. In addition, a female screw into which a screw is screwed is formed on the projecting front end surface of the protruding portion 11613a. The intermediate base 11613 can be fastened to the front base 11611 by screwing a screw inserted through the through hole of the outer wall portion 11611b into the female screw.

  The intermediate base 11613 is disposed between the protrusion 11613a described above and the irradiation unit 650 is disposed at a position facing the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650.

  Here, as described above, the tenth embodiment is configured such that two projection plate members 11620 are irradiated with the light of one LED 651. Therefore, in order to make light easily incident on the side end surfaces of the two projection plate members 11620, it is preferable to dispose the LED 651 at the center position between the two projection plate members 11620 facing each other.

  However, if the LED 651 is disposed in the middle between the two projection plate members 11620 facing each other, the light emitted from the LED easily enters between the two projection plate members 11620 facing each other. When light is incident between the two projection plate members 11620, the space between the two projection plate members 11620 is brightened, is incident from the side end surfaces of the two light transmission members, and is reflected by the reflection unit 622 for display. There is a problem that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the pattern or pattern to be displayed.

  On the other hand, in the tenth embodiment, the intermediate base 11613 is disposed between the two projection plate members 11620 facing each other and at a position facing the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the light irradiated from the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 from entering between the two projection plate members 11620 facing each other. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 11620.

  Further, the intermediate base 11613 is formed with an inclined surface 11613b in which an end surface facing the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is inclined toward a side end surface (light incident surface) of each projection plate member 11620. Thereby, the light irradiated to the intermediate base 11613 out of the light emitted from the LED 651 can be reflected to the side end surface side of each projection plate member 11620 by the inclined surface 11613b. As a result, the amount of light incident on the projection plate member 11620 can be increased, and the player can easily recognize the pattern or pattern displayed on the projection plate member 11620.

  Next, the projection plate member 11620 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 99A to 99C are schematic views of the projection plate member 11620 and the irradiation unit 650 as viewed from the front. In FIGS. 99 (a) to 99 (c), the pattern displayed on the projection plate member 11620 disposed on the front side is given the pattern H and the pattern J disposed on the back side. These are shown with reference numerals. Each of the patterns H and J is shown in a real battle when being displayed, and is shown with an alternate long and short dash line when not being displayed.

  The projection plate member 11620 includes, on its outer surface, an incident surface 11620a that can receive the light emitted from the LED 651 and a non-incident surface 11620b that cannot receive the light emitted from the LED 651, and is irradiated from the LED 651. By irradiating the non-incident surface 11620b with light, the light can be made non-incident into the projection plate member 11620.

  Here, as described above, when the light of one LED 651 is incident on the two projection plate members 11620, only one or the other of the two projection plate members 11620 is turned off (not displayed). In other words, both projection plate members 11620 are turned off (not displayed) when the irradiation of the light of the LED 651 is turned off to turn off one or the other. Therefore, a new problem has been found that the variation in production is reduced accordingly.

  On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, the projection plate member 11620 includes the incident surface 11620a and the non-incident surface 11620b on the outer peripheral surface thereof, and thus either one of the two projection plate members 11620 is turned off (not displayed). ), The non-incident surface 11620b of the projection plate member 11620 is disposed at a position facing the light irradiation surface of the LED 651, so that only one projection plate member 11620 is turned off (not displayed). Can do. As a result, it is possible to ensure a variation in performance by the two projection plate members 11620.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the incident surfaces 11620a and the non-incident surfaces 11620b are alternately arranged at regular intervals, and the irradiation units 650 are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals corresponding to the non-incident surfaces. Thus, the entire area of the projection plate member 11620 formed in a disk shape can be easily emitted uniformly with the light of the LED 651. In addition, with a small amount of rotation, it is possible to switch between a state where light is allowed to enter the projection plate member 11620 and a state where it is restricted.

  In the tenth embodiment, the incident surface 11620a and the non-incident surface 11620b are alternately formed in the range of 30 degrees in the circumferential direction of the projection plate member 11620. Thereby, the projection plate member 11620 can be switched between display and non-display of the pattern on the projection plate member 11620 by being rotated approximately 30 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  According to the projection plate member 11620 configured as described above, when the pattern H and the pattern J displayed on the projection plate member 11520 are formed in an equilateral triangle and displayed at the center of the projection plate member 11520. 99 (a), the projection plate member disposed on the back side as shown in D04 (b) from the state in which both the pattern H and the pattern J are displayed on both projection plate members 11620. The pattern J can be hidden by rotating only 11620 in the circumferential direction by 30 degrees.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 99 (c) from the state of FIG. 99 (b), the projection plate member 11620 disposed on the back side is further rotated by 30 degrees, whereby the pattern H, Both patterns J can be displayed and the display can be reversed up and down. That is, the phase of the pattern displayed by the pattern H and the pattern J can be changed by changing the phase of the two projection plate members 11620. As a result, it is possible to ensure a variation in performance by the two projection plate members 11620.

  In the eleventh embodiment, since the drive motor 661 is connected to each of the two projection plate members 11620, the two projection plate members 11620 can be rotated independently of each other. As a result, the two projection plate members 11620 can be moved to a predetermined phase by the shortest distance rotation. As a result, the display by the two projection plate members 11620 can be performed quickly.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above embodiments, a gaming machine may be configured by replacing or combining part or all of one embodiment with part or all of another one or more embodiments.

  In the first and second embodiments, the case where a total of four first blocks 653 and second blocks 654 are disposed on the substrate member 652 in the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 has been described. The total number of the first block 653 and the second block 654 is not limited, and may be 3 or less, or 5 or more. In this case, the ratio of the first block 653 and the second block 654 is arbitrary, and may be only the first block 653 or only the second block 654.

  In the first and second embodiments, the case where the LED 651 is disposed on the front surface of the substrate member 652 and the first block 653 and the second block 654 are disposed on the back surface has been described. Instead of the LED 651, the LED 651, the first block 653, and the second block 654 may be disposed in front of the board member 652. In this case, the LED 651 is accommodated in the first block 653 and the second block 654, and the light emitted from the LED 651 is projected from the opening formed in front of the first block 653 and the second block 654. The light is incident on the outer peripheral surface of the plate member 620.

  In the first and second embodiments, the case where the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 of the projection unit 600 are formed from a light-transmitting material has been described. 630 and groove forming members 640 and 2640 may be formed of two layers of a light transmissive material and a non-transmissive material.

  For example, the back surface 632 side of the gear member 630 and the front surface 642 side of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are formed of a non-permeable material layer, and the projection plate members 620 and 2620 side of the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are formed. It may be formed of a layer of permeable material. In this case, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from other devices in the game area from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620 by the layer of the non-permeable material. That is, light emitted from a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by the layer of non-transmissive material.

  As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (no light is incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and no pattern or design is displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), It can be suppressed that light is incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and a pattern or a pattern is displayed on the front surface of the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

  In this case, the layer formed of the non-transmissive material is formed of a highly reflective metal material or a flexible material, or between the non-transmissive material layer and the transmissive material layer. It is preferable to interpose a highly reflective metallic material or flexible material. Thereby, the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 from the LED 651 can be more easily reflected on the projection plate members 620 and 2620. As a result, the light reflected from the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 can be strengthened, and the pattern or design can be clearly revealed.

  In the first and second embodiments, the case where the rear surface portion 632 of the gear member 630 of the projection unit 600 and the front surface portion 642 of the groove forming members 640 and 2640 are in contact with air (atmosphere) has been described. For example, a seal of a member (for example, silver foil or aluminum) having a higher reflectivity than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is attached to the rear view 632 and the front portion 642, or a color having a high reflectivity (For example, white) may be printed.

  In this case, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from other devices in the game area from entering the projection plate members 620 and 2620 by sticking or printing. That is, light emitted from a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by sticking or printing.

  As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (no light is incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and no pattern or design is displayed on the front of the projection plate members 620 and 2620), It can be suppressed that light is incident on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 and a pattern or a pattern is displayed on the front surface of the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

  Furthermore, the light incident on the gear member 630 and the groove forming members 640 and 2640 from the LED 651 can be more easily reflected on the projection plate members 620 and 2620 by sealing or printing. As a result, the light reflected from the reflecting portion 622 and emitted from the front side of the projection plate members 620 and 2620 can be strengthened, and the pattern or design can be clearly revealed.

  In addition, when attaching a seal | sticker, you may attach the seal | sticker in the state protruded from the back part 632 of the gear member 630 and the front part 642 of the groove | channel formation members 640 and 2640 to the outer edge side. In this case, since the light radiated from the LED 651 and spreading in a fan shape can be reflected by the protruding seal portion, the light radiated from the LED 651 can be easily condensed on the projection plate members 620 and 2620.

  In the third embodiment, the case where an air layer is formed between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620 has been described. Instead, a plate member made of a non-transparent material having higher reflectivity than the gear member 630 and the groove forming member 640 is provided between the gear member 3630 and the projection plate member 3620 and between the groove forming member 3640 and the projection plate member 3620. It may be interposed.

  In this case, the light incident on the projection plate member 3620 is surely totally reflected by the plate member made of a non-transmissive material having a high reflectance, and can be advanced from the edge of the projection plate member 3620 toward the center side. it can. Therefore, it can suppress that the intensity | strength (light quantity) of the light irradiated at irradiation angle (alpha) 3 reduces, the light reflected by the reflection part 622 and inject | emitted from the front side of the projection plate member 3620 is strengthened, Patterns and designs can be clearly revealed.

  Further, the light emitted from another device in the game area can be prevented from entering the projection plate member 3620 by the plate member made of a non-transparent material with high reflectance. That is, light emitted from a device other than the irradiation unit 650 can be blocked by a plate member made of a non-transmissive material having a high reflectance.

  As a result, when the irradiation unit 650 is turned off (no light is incident on the projection plate member 3620 and no pattern or design is displayed on the front surface of the projection plate member 3620), light from other devices is projected onto the projection plate. It can suppress that a pattern and a symbol are displayed on the front of the projection plate member 3620 by being incident on the member 3620.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the means for biasing the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is a coil spring has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an elastic body of a rubber-like body, a torsion spring, A leaf spring may be used. The attachment method is exemplified by a state in which the protrusion 852 and the protrusion 823 are connected and attached, or an aspect in which the protrusion 852 is attached between the rotation shaft of the displacement member 850 and the shaft support portion 821 of the base member 820.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the displacement member 850 of the vertical displacement unit 800 is rotationally moved about the shaft hole 851 formed at one end. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. 850 may be one that slides and displaces a guide groove formed in the front base 820. In this case, if both ends of the guide groove of the front base 820 are formed at different positions in the vertical direction (gravity direction), the displacement of the displacement member 850 in the gravitational direction is the same as in the first embodiment. Since it can be an orthogonal projection motion of constant-velocity circular motion and a change can be given to the displacement speed, it is possible to cause the displacement member 850 to perform an interesting displacement.

  In the first to third and sixth embodiments, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is disposed at a position facing the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 has been described. For example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be disposed at a position facing the side end surfaces of the gear members 630 and 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640 and 3640.

  Also in this case, similarly to the first to third, fifth, and sixth embodiments, the light of the LED 651 is incident from the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630 or the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640, and the projection plate. Patterns and symbols can be displayed on the surfaces of the members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620.

  Further, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is not opposed to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 (that is, the light irradiation of the LED 651). The surface of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630, and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction), and the light emitted from the LED 651 May be arranged so as to be incident on the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640.

  In this case, the light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is irradiated obliquely from the irradiation surface of the LED 651 while irradiating other non-irradiation members different from the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620. A part of the light can be incident on the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the gear members 630, 3630 and the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640. That is, the LED 651 can be used for both the light for displaying the pattern and the pattern on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 and the light for irradiating other irradiated objects.

  In the first to third, fifth, and sixth embodiments, the case where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 and the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, and 6620 are disposed in parallel has been described. For example, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 may be tilted with respect to the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620.

  Specifically, the light irradiating surface of the LED 651 is disposed toward the back side, and the light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the illuminating surface of the LED 651 is disposed on the position where the LED 651 is disposed on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620. , 6620 may be irradiated to the side end faces. In this case, when a pattern or a pattern is displayed on the surface of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, the light of the LED 651 leaks out from the inner edges of the front bases 612, 6612 formed in an annular shape in front view. This can be suppressed.

  In addition, the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is disposed toward the front side, and the light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of the LED 651 is disposed on the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620. It is good also as a position irradiated to a side end surface.

  Further, the LED 651 is disposed in a state where the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is tilted with respect to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620 toward the back side or the front side, and the LED 651 is disposed at the position where the LED 651 is disposed. It is good also as a position where the light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to this irradiation surface is irradiated to the side end surfaces of the groove forming members 640, 2640, 3640 or the side end surfaces of the gear members 630, 3630.

  In addition, the LED 651 is disposed in a state in which the light irradiation surface of the LED 651 is tilted with respect to the side end surfaces of the projection plate members 620, 2620, 3620, 6620, with the light irradiation surface facing the back side or the front side. It is good also as a position where the light irradiated in the direction orthogonal to the irradiation surface of LED651 is irradiated to the front part 632 of the groove formation members 640, 2640, 3640 or the back part 632 of the gear members 630, 3630.

  In the fifth embodiment, the light emitted from the LED 651 disposed on the front surface of the second block 654 is incident on the projection plate member 5620 from the left and right side surfaces of the projection plate member 5620, so that the light is irradiated from the front of the projection plate member 5620. Although the case where the emitted light quantity is increased has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and a pattern or a pattern displayed on the projection plate member 5620 by light incident from the left and right sides of the projection plate member 5620 is changed to the projection plate member. The pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 5620 may be different from the light incident from the upper end surface of the 5620.

  That is, the upper end of the projection plate member 5620 is formed by providing an air layer or a non-light-transmitting material inside the projection plate member 5620 and dividing the region of the reflection part 622 (for example, dividing into three regions). The light incident from the front part is emitted from the front side by the reflection part 622 of the first region, and the light incident from the left side surface is emitted from the front side by the reflection part 622 of the second region and from the right side surface. Incident light can be emitted from the front side by the reflecting portion 622 of the third region. As a result, a plurality of patterns and design patterns displayed on the projection plate member 5620 can be formed, and the player's interest can be suppressed from being impaired.

  In this case, a plurality of light sources (LEDs 651) for irradiating the first to third regions are provided around the irradiated body (projection plate member 5620) to irradiate the first to third regions (for example, on the top). The arranged light source irradiates the first region with light incident from the upper end, the light source arranged on the left side irradiates the second region by entering from the left end surface, and the light source arranged on the right side is the right end. However, there is a problem in that the product cost increases because it is necessary to provide a plurality of light sources.

  On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 is rotated with respect to the first block 653 by the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620, so that Since the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 disposed in front can be changed, it is possible to irradiate two areas, that is, a case where the second or third area is irradiated and a case where the first area is irradiated. Therefore, the number of the LEDs 651 disposed can be reduced correspondingly, and the increase in product cost can be suppressed.

  In the fifth embodiment, the case where the light irradiation direction of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654 is changed in accordance with the slide displacement of the projection plate member 5620 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the rotating member 5670 may be rotated by being connected to the shaft portion of the drive motor newly disposed.

  In this case, the rotation member 5670 can be rotated regardless of the slide position of the projection plate member 5620 to change the irradiation direction of the light of the LED 651 disposed in front of the second block 654, and thus the projection plate member 5620. It is possible to partially increase or decrease the amount of light emitted from the front. In other words, the direction of light incident on the projection plate member 5620 can be displaced to change the shade of the display of patterns and symbols displayed on the projection plate member 5620.

  In the first embodiment, the projection plate member 620, the plurality of irradiation units 650 that irradiate the projection plate member 620, and the gear that transmits the driving force of the drive motor 661, between the opposed surfaces of the front base 612 and the back base 611. Although the case where the rows (gears 662 to 664) are arranged as one unit has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-described unit (projection) is provided between the opposing surfaces of the front base 612 and the rear base 611. The plate member 620, the irradiation unit 650, and the gear train (gears 662 to 664) may be arranged in a state where two or more are stacked in the front-rear direction.

  In this case, by displaying the patterns and symbols on the respective projection plate members 620, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the patterns and symbols displayed on the respective projection plate members 620 in combination. As a result, by changing the rotational position of each projection plate member 620, it is possible to form a display pattern of a plurality of patterns and symbols, and to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the projection plate member 620 is rotationally displaced has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the projection plate member 620 may be fixed and the irradiation unit 650 may be displaced. .

  In the third embodiment, the case has been described in which the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the center side from the side end portion of the projection plate member 3620 at the position where the bolt T is disposed, but this is not necessarily limited thereto. Instead, the bolt T may be formed of a metal material (for example, iron or stainless steel), and the light projected on the side surface may be reflected to the center side of the projection plate member 3620. In this case, it is possible to easily collect the light emitted from the LED 651 at the center of the projection plate member 3620.

  In addition, a plurality of bolts T are arranged at regular intervals, and a portion where a pattern or a pattern is not displayed on the surface of the projection plate member 3620 (the light of the LED 651 is not incident) is partially formed. The display may be divided.

  Further, as described above, the grounding surface of the fastening portion between the projection plate member 3620, the groove forming member 3640, and the gear member 3630 is a surface that overlaps the opening 646 in the radial direction (see FIG. 65 (c)). A place where light is not incident can be a ground plane.

  That is, since the bolt T is inserted into the opening 646, when light is incident from the outside in the radial direction of the opening 646, the light is blocked by the bolt T, and the light of the LED 651 is not incident on the reflecting portion 622 side. Therefore, it is possible to reliably suppress the light incident on the groove forming member 3640 and the gear member 3630 from the LED 651 from being incident on the projection plate member 3620 side.

  In this case, by displacing the irradiation unit 650 in a state where the light of the LED 651 disposed in the irradiation unit 650 is irradiated, the player can visually recognize that the projection plate member 620 is displaced (rotated). .

  In addition, the displacement of the irradiation unit 650 in this case may be a slide displacement or a rotational displacement, and the irradiation directions of the LEDs 651 arranged in the first block 653 and the second block 654 are displaced in different directions. It may be a thing.

  In the seventh embodiment, the case where three projection plate members 7620 are arranged in parallel in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Four or more may be provided.

  In the seventh to eleventh embodiments, the case where the projection plate members 7620, 10620, and 11620 are formed to be substantially the same as the projection plate members 7620, 10620, and 11620 arranged in parallel has been described. It may be arranged in parallel with each other having different external shapes.

  In the seventh embodiment, the case where the three irradiation units 650 are arranged in the same direction with respect to the three projection plate members 7620 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The units 650 may be arranged in different directions with respect to the plurality of projection plate members 7620. This modification will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 100A is a sectional view of a projection unit 7600 as a modification. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. Further, the cross section of FIG. 100A corresponds to the cross section of FIG.

  As shown to Fig.100 (a), the irradiation units 650 are alternately arrange | positioned to the up-down direction (arrow UD direction) outer side along the direction (arrow FB direction) where the projection plate member 7620 is arranged in parallel. Is done. More specifically, the irradiation unit 650 is disposed on the upper base member 7690 on the upper side (arrow U direction side) in the first projection plate member 7620 disposed on the front side (arrow F direction side). . The second projection plate member 7620 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the first projection plate member 7620 is irradiated to the lower base member 7680 on the lower side (arrow D direction side). A unit 650 is provided. In the third projection plate member 7620 disposed on the back side of the second projection plate member 7620, the irradiation unit 650 is disposed on the upper base member 7690 on the upper side. The lower base member 7680 is composed of a member that can be divided in the same manner as the upper base member 7690, and the irradiation unit 650 can be disposed therein.

  In this case, the irradiation unit 650 that irradiates the projection plate member 7620 at the adjacent position arranged side by side is arranged at a different position in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the projection plate member 7620 is arranged in parallel (the vertical direction in this modification). An arrangement space for the light emitting unit 650 can be easily secured. Therefore, when the distance between the opposing projection plate members 7620 in the juxtaposed direction is reduced, the light emitting units 650 can be prevented from colliding with each other. As a result, the distance between the opposing projection plate members 7620 arranged in parallel can be minimized, so that the external shape of the projection unit 7600 in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

  Further, the irradiation unit 650 is disposed at a different position across the projection plate member 7620 in a direction orthogonal to the direction in which the projection plate members 7620 are arranged in parallel. Here, when the irradiation unit 650 having a base for controlling the light irradiation is arranged in a direction parallel to the direction in which the projection plate members 7620 are arranged in parallel, the thermal energy at the time of light irradiation is one. Since the thermal energy is partially increased due to the concentration in the direction and the base or the like may be damaged, the irradiation unit is disposed at different positions with the projection plate member 7620 in between. Thermal energy can be dispersed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the irradiation unit 650 from being damaged.

  In the seventh embodiment, the case where three projection plate members 7620 are arranged has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the projection plate member 7620 is formed from one plate member. Also good. This modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100B is a sectional view of a projection unit 7600 as a modification. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. Moreover, the cross section of FIG.100 (b) respond | corresponds with the cross section of FIG.81 (c).

  As shown in FIG. 100 (b), the projection plate member 7620 is formed of a single member and has three reflecting portions 622 arranged in parallel in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). Further, above the projection plate member 7620, there are provided three irradiation units 650 disposed with their irradiation surfaces facing the three reflection portions 622.

  According to this, by switching on / off (off) the three irradiation units 650, the reflection position of the light reflected toward the front side by the reflection unit 622 is changed in the front-rear direction (arrow F−). B direction). Therefore, it is possible to change the display mode of patterns and symbols displayed on the projection plate member 7620. As a result, the player can easily pay attention to the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 7620, and the effect of the display on the projection plate member 7620 can be enhanced.

  In addition, the distance from the player's viewpoint to the reflection position of the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 7620 (pattern or design display surface) can be changed. Therefore, in the case where the projection plate member 7620 is disposed near the player's viewpoint, the player can visually recognize a pattern or a symbol display larger than in the case where the projection plate member 7620 is disposed far from the player's viewpoint. . Accordingly, it is possible to make the player easily pay attention to the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 7620, and to enhance the effect produced by the display on the projection plate member 7620.

  In the eighth and ninth embodiments, the case has been described in which the projection plate member 7620 disposed on the back side (arrow B direction side) of the two projection plate members 7620 arranged side by side is moved. For example, both of the two projection plate members 7620 arranged side by side may be moved, or the projection plate member 7620 disposed on the front side may be moved.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where the projection unit 10600 is configured by the first unit 10600A and the second unit 10600B formed in two cylindrical shapes has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The annular units 10601A and 10601B of the first unit 10600A and the second unit 10600B may be configured by one projection plate member 10620A and 10620B, respectively.

  In this case, the projection plate members 10620A and 10620B are configured to receive light from the LEDs 651 disposed in the upper disk bodies 10602A and 10602B or the lower disk bodies 10603A and 10603B. According to this, when a pattern or a pattern is displayed on one of the projection plate members 10620A and 10620B, the other projection plate members 10620A and 10620B that are not displayed are set to the first rotation position and the second rotation position. , The player can be retracted from the direction connecting the player's viewpoint and one of the projection plate members 10620A and 10620B. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the patterns and symbols displayed on one of the projection plate members 10620A and 10620B.

  Further, in this case, the other projection plate members 10620A and 10620B to be retracted can be moved to the retracted position and can change the distance in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) only by rotating around the axis O. it can. Therefore, the drive structure of the projection plate members 10620A and 10620B can be simplified. As a result, product cost can be reduced.

  In the tenth embodiment, only the case where the base member 10610A of the annular unit 10601A is formed of a non-permeable material has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the end surface on the radially inner side of the base member 10610A A reflective member having a high reflectivity may be provided. This modification will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 101A is a cross-sectional view of a projection unit 10600 as a modification, and FIG. 101B is a front view of the projection unit 10600 viewed in the direction of arrow CIb in FIG. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. FIG. 101 (a) corresponds to the cross-sectional view of FIG. 93 (b). Furthermore, in FIG. 101 (b), the projection plate member 10620A and the projection plate member 10620B formed from a transmissive member are shown in a transparent manner. In FIG. 101 (b), the display (character of chance) of the projection plate member 10620A reflected by the reflection member 10615A is shown by a solid line, and the projection plate member 10620A of the real image is blocked by the base member 10610B. ) (Characters of chances opposite to the left and right) are shown by a one-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIG. 101, a reflecting member 10615A is disposed on a base member 10610A inside the annular unit 10601A. The reflecting member 10615A reflects the light reflected by the reflecting portion 622 of the projection plate member 10620A (the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 10620A), and the outline of the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 10620A is reflected. The reflective member 10615A is formed of a metal material having a reflectance that can be recognized by a player who visually recognizes the reflective member 10615A.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 101 (a), the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 10620A arranged on the back side (second rotation position) is reflected by the reflecting member 10615A and visually recognized by the player. Can be made.

  Here, when the projection plate member 10620A is rotated between the first rotation position and the second rotation position by rotating around the axis O, the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 10620A is displayed on the front side ( When viewed from the player side), the displayed patterns and figures are displayed in the opposite directions at the first rotation position and the second rotation position. Accordingly, a new problem has been discovered that makes it difficult for the player to read the symbols and patterns displayed on the projection plate member 10620A.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the player visually recognizes the display of the projection plate member 10620A disposed on the back side (second rotational position), the reflection member 10615A disposed on the base member 10610A is By reflecting the display on the projection plate member 10620A arranged on the back side and making it visible to the player, the pattern or design that is the opposite display when viewed from the player side is reversed and visible to the player Can be made. As a result, even when the projection plate member 10620A is disposed at the second rotation position, it is possible to make it easier for the player to read the display of the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 10620A.

  Note that the reflecting member 10615A may be disposed on the base member 10610B of the annular unit 10601B disposed on the inner side. According to this, a pattern or a pattern displayed on the projection plate member 10620A or the projection plate member 10620B arranged on the back side (second rotation position) is visually recognized by the player via the reflection member 10615A (reflected). Can be made.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 101A and 101B, the display of the projection plate member 10620A disposed on the back side of the first unit 10600A disposed outside the second unit 10600B is displayed to the player. In the case of visual recognition, the projection plate member 10620B of the second unit 10600B is disposed at a substantially intermediate position between the first rotation position and the second rotation position, and the base member 10610B of the second unit 10600B is disposed in the front-rear direction. It is preferable.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 101 (b), the pattern displayed on the projection plate member 10620A arranged on the back side of the first unit 10600A (in FIG. 101 (b), the character “chance” displayed in the opposite direction ) Is blocked by the projection plate member 10620B of the second unit 10600B, and the player can be prevented from directly viewing. That is, the base member 10610B is disposed between the projection plate member 10620A and the player's viewpoint. Thereby, it can suppress that a player visually recognizes both the display of the projection board member 10620A reflected by the reflection member 10615A, and the display of the projection board member 10620A of a real image. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to read the display of the patterns and symbols displayed on the projection plate member 10620A.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where one reflecting portion 622 is formed on one projection plate member 10620A (or projection plate member 10620B) has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Two reflecting portions may be formed on the plate member 10620A. This modification will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 102 (a) is a perspective view of a projection plate member 10620A as a modification, and FIG. 102 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CIIb-CIIb in FIG. 102 (a). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as said each embodiment, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. In FIG. 102 (a), the display area of the pattern or figure displayed by the light reflected by each of the reflecting portions 10622a and 10622b is surrounded by a two-dot chain line, and the area R1 and the area R2 are labeled. As shown.

  As shown in FIG. 102, as a modification, the projection plate member 10620A has a first reflecting portion 10622a formed on the side surface on the front side (arrow F direction side) and a second reflection on the side surface on the back side (arrow B direction side). A portion 10622b is formed. Further, the first LED 10651a is disposed with the irradiation surface facing the upper side surface of the projection plate member 10620A formed in a rectangular shape in front view, and the second LED 10651b is directed toward the right side surface of the projection plate member 10620A in front view. Arranged.

  The first reflecting portion 10622a includes a plurality of grooves extending in the left-right direction and arranged in parallel in the up-down direction, and is formed in the region R1. Further, the outer shape of the first reflecting portion 10622a in front view is formed in a pattern or pattern shape such as a letter or character of “chance”, and the light emitted from the first LED 10651a is irradiated in the radial direction of the annular unit 10601A. By reflecting toward the outside (the arrow F direction side in FIG. 102B), it is possible to display a pattern or design on the outer peripheral surface side of the curved projection plate member 10620A.

  The second reflecting portion 10622b includes a plurality of grooves that extend in the vertical direction and are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction, and are formed in the region R2. In addition, the second reflective portion 10622b has an outer shape in a front view that is formed in a pattern or pattern opposite to the outer shape of the first reflective portion 10622a in the left-right direction, and the light emitted from the second LED 10651b is an annular unit 10601A. By reflecting toward the inner side in the radial direction (the direction of arrow B in FIG. 102B), a pattern or design can be displayed on the inner peripheral surface side of the curved projection plate member 10620A.

  In addition, since the 2nd reflection part 10622b is formed in the groove | channel shape long in the vertical direction, the light irradiated to the 2nd reflection part 10622b from 1st LED 10651a will pass the inside of the groove | channel of the 2nd reflection part 10622b, The light is not reflected by the second reflecting portion 10622b and travels inside the projection plate member 10620A. On the other hand, since the first reflection part 10622a is formed in a groove shape that is long in the lateral direction, the light emitted from the second LED 10651b to the first reflection part 10622a travels inside the groove of the first reflection part 10622a.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the light emitted from one (or the other) of the two LEDs 10651a and 10651b is reflected to one (or the other) of the two reflecting portions 10622a and 10622b to project the projection plate member 10620A. Patterns and designs can be displayed on the screen.

  In the present embodiment, when the projection plate member 10620A is disposed at the first rotation position, light is irradiated from the first LED 10651a so that a pattern or a pattern is displayed on the projection plate member 10620A. The When the projection plate member 10620A is disposed at the second rotation position, light is emitted from the second LED 10651b, and a pattern is set to be displayed on the projection plate member 10620A.

  Here, when the projection plate member 10620A is rotated between the first rotation position and the second rotation position by rotating around the axis O, the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 10620A is displayed on the front side ( When viewed from the player side), the displayed patterns and figures are displayed in the opposite directions at the first rotation position and the second rotation position. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to read the symbols and patterns displayed on the projection plate member 10620A.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the projection plate member 10620A projects light at the first rotation position and the second rotation position because the portions where light is reflected are different between the first rotation position and the second rotation position. It is easy for the player to read the symbols and patterns displayed on the plate member 10620A.

  In this case, as described above, the outer shapes in the front view of the first reflecting portion 10622a and the second reflecting portion 10622b are formed opposite to each other in the left-right direction, and thus the projection plate member at the first rotation position and the second rotation position. Since the pattern and the pattern displayed on 10620A can be made the same in the front view, the player can easily read the pattern and the pattern displayed on the projection plate member 10620A.

  Further, the regions R1 and R2 are formed at positions overlapping in the front-rear direction (arrow F-R direction) when the projection plate member 10620 is viewed from the front. As a result, the positions of the patterns and symbols displayed on the projection plate member 10620A at the first rotation position and the second rotation position can be substantially the same as the projection plate member 10620A in the front view. It is easy for the player to read the symbols and patterns displayed on the member 10620A.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the incident surface 11620a and the non-incident surface 11620b of the projection plate member 11620 are alternately formed at the same angle with respect to the circumferential direction of the projection plate member 11620 has been described. It is not limited to this. For example, the incident surface 11620a and the non-incident surface 11620b may be formed with different sizes.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the projection plate member 11620 has been described with respect to the case where the incident surface on which light can be incident and the non-incident surface on which light cannot be incident are formed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, a second incident surface having a light incident rate different from that of the incident surface may be disposed. According to this, it is possible to change the darkness of the pattern or design displayed on the projection plate member 10620 between the incident surface and the second incident surface. As a result, a variation in the display of the projection plate member 10620 that can be visually recognized by the player can be made, so that the effect produced by the display of the projection plate member 10620 can be enhanced.

  In the eleventh embodiment, when the drive motor 661 for applying a driving force to the projection plate member 11620 is connected to each of the two projection plate members 11620, and the two projection plate members 11620 are independently driven to rotate. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, two projection plate members may be connected to one drive motor 661.

  In this case, by making the gear ratios of the annular racks 11625a of the two projection plate members 11620 different from each other, by making a difference in the rotation amount of the two projection plate members 11620, one of the two projection plate members 11620a. By disposing the non-incident surface 11620b of the projection plate member 11620 at a position facing the light irradiation member, one projection plate member 11620 out of the two projection plate members 11620 can be turned off (patterns and designs are not displayed). it can.

  In order to make a difference between the rotation amounts of the two projection plate members 11620, the diameter of the gear GY5 that transmits the driving force to the two projection plate members 11620 is not limited to different gear ratios. It may be different.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the irradiation unit 650 has been described with respect to the case where the size of the projection plate member 11620 in the circumferential direction is set to be approximately the same as the non-incident surface 11620b of the projection plate member 11620. It is not something that can be done. For example, the irradiation unit 650 may be formed so that the size of the projection plate member 11620 in the circumferential direction is smaller than the non-incident surface 11620b of the projection plate member 11620.

  According to this, the light emitted from the irradiation unit 650 when the non-incident surface 11620b of the projection plate member 11620 and the irradiation unit 650 are moved to a position facing each other and the display of the projection plate member 11620 is not displayed. Can be prevented from being irradiated onto the incident surface 11620a of the projection plate member 11620. As a result, the display on the projection plate member 11620 can be easily maintained in a non-display state.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the projection plate member 11620 is formed in a disk shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, shield portions that protrude in the radial direction may be formed at both circumferential ends of the non-incident surface 11620b of the projection plate member 11620.

  According to this, the light emitted from the irradiation unit 650 when the non-incident surface 11620b of the projection plate member 11620 and the irradiation unit 650 are moved to a position facing each other and the display of the projection plate member 11620 is not displayed. Can be prevented by the shielding portion from being irradiated on the incident surface 11620a of the projection plate member 11620. As a result, the display on the projection plate member 11620 can be easily maintained in a non-display state.

  In addition, as a shape of a shielding part, even if it forms as a protrusion which protrudes partially, it may bulge and form on a semicircular arc. Any shape that blocks the light emitted from the LED 651 arranged to face the non-incident surface 11620b and proceeding to the incident surface 11620a by the shielding portion may be used.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the irradiation unit 650 has been described with respect to the case where the base member 652 is disposed along the outer edge of the projection plate member 11620. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the base member 652 of the irradiation unit 650 may be formed in a curved shape having a radius smaller than the radius of the projection plate member 11620.

  According to this, since the emission direction of the LED 651 of the irradiation unit 650 can be a direction toward the center of curvature of the base member 652, the light of the irradiation unit 650 spreads with respect to the circumferential direction of the projection plate member 11620. Can be suppressed. Accordingly, when the non-incident surface 11620b of the projection plate member 11620 and the irradiation unit 650 are moved to a position facing each other, and the display of the projection plate member 11620 is not displayed, the light emitted from the irradiation unit 650 is reflected by the projection plate. Irradiation to the incident surface 11620a of the member 11620 can be suppressed. As a result, the display on the projection plate member 11620 can be easily maintained in a non-display state.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<About the concept of the invention taking the projection plate member 620 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
A light transmissive member formed in a plate shape from a light transmissive material and having a reflecting portion; and a light irradiating means for irradiating light to a side end surface of the light transmissive member, and is incident from the side end surface of the light transmissive member. In the gaming machine in which the reflected light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the light transmitting member, the ratio of the light emitted from the front of the light transmitting member out of the light emitted from the light irradiating means is increased. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it includes an emission increasing means that is disposed outside the display area.

  Here, a light transmissive member formed in a plate shape from a light transmissive material and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiation means for irradiating light to a side end surface of the light transmissive member, from the side end surface of the light transmissive member. A gaming machine in which incident light is reflected by a reflecting portion and emitted from the front of a light transmitting member is known (for example, JP-A-2015-29735). According to this type of gaming machine, for example, by arranging the light transmitting member on the front side of the liquid crystal display device in the game area, the player can display the liquid crystal display device through the light transmitting member in a normal state. On the other hand, when a predetermined gaming state is formed, the light irradiated from the light irradiation means is incident from the side end surface of the light transmission member, and the light traveling inside the light transmission member is reflected by the reflection portion. Then, the light is transmitted from the front of the light transmitting member. In this case, the reflecting portion includes a plurality of groups each composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces, and each group has a pattern or a pattern shape. Therefore, the player can recognize the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member as a pattern or a pattern. That is, along with the display of the liquid crystal display device, a pattern or a pattern can be raised (displayed) on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device.

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is weak. For this reason, it becomes difficult to clearly display (display) a pattern or a pattern. In this case, if the output of the light irradiating means is increased, not only the cost and power consumption increase, but also the amount of heat generated increases, which causes a problem that heat is exerted on other members and devices.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the game machine A1 includes the emission increasing means for increasing the ratio of the light emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member in the light emitted from the light irradiating means. The light emitted from the front surface of the transmissive member can be increased. As a result, it is possible to clearly display (display) a pattern or a pattern. In addition, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the emission increasing means is arranged outside the display area, it can be hardly seen by the player, and the appearance can be prevented from deteriorating accordingly.

  In addition, the formation position of the reflection part of the light transmissive member may be, for example, the back surface of the light transmissive member, or may be inside the light transmissive member.

  In the gaming machine A1, the emission increasing means includes an outer edge member disposed along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the rear surface of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine A2, since the emission increasing means includes the outer edge member disposed along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the rear surface of the light transmitting member, the light increasing means irradiates the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Not only the light that reaches directly, but also the light that is irradiated from the light irradiation means and reflected by the outer edge member can be made incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Condensation efficiency can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the light reaching the reflection part of the light transmission member among the light irradiated from the light irradiation means, so that the light reflected from the reflection part and emitted from the front of the light transmission member is strengthened. , Patterns and designs can be clearly displayed (displayed). In addition, since it is not necessary to increase the output of the light irradiation means, the amount of heat generated can be reduced, and the influence of heat on other members and equipment can be suppressed.

  Further, in this way, when the emission increasing means includes the outer edge member disposed along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the rear surface of the light transmitting member, when other devices in the game area emit light. Can prevent the light from the other device from being blocked by the outer edge member and entering from the side end face of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiation means is turned off (when light is not incident on the light transmitting member and no pattern or design is displayed on the front surface of the light transmitting member), light from another device enters the light transmitting member. It can suppress that a pattern and a pattern are displayed on the front of a light transmissive member.

  In the gaming machine A2, the outer edge member is disposed on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, the gaming machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the outer edge members are arranged on the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, respectively, so that the light transmitting member of the light irradiated from the light irradiating means. Light that is not directly incident on the side end face but is off the front side of the light transmitting member and light that is off the back side is reflected by the front outer edge member and the rear outer edge member, respectively, and is incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member. be able to. Therefore, the condensing efficiency of the light incident on the side end face of the light transmitting member can be further increased accordingly.

  Further, by providing the outer edge member on each of the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member in this way, even when light emitted from other devices in the game area arrives from either the front or back side of the light transmitting member. Since it can be blocked by each of the front outer edge member and the rear outer edge member, it can be prevented from entering from the side end face of the light transmitting member. Therefore, when the light irradiation means is turned off (when light is not incident on the light transmitting member and no pattern or design is displayed on the front surface of the light transmitting member), light from another device enters the light transmitting member. Thus, it is possible to more reliably suppress the display of a pattern or a pattern on the front surface of the light transmitting member.

  In the gaming machine A2 or A3, the outer edge member is arranged to project outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2 or A3, the outer edge member is arranged so as to protrude outward from the side end surface of the light transmitting member, so that the light irradiated from the light irradiation means Further, it is possible to easily reflect the reflected light at the projecting portion of the outer edge member (surface connected to the side end surface of the light transmitting member) and to enter the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the condensing efficiency of the light incident on the side end face of the light transmitting member can be further increased accordingly.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the outer edge member is formed of a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine A5, since the outer edge member is formed of a material having a smaller refractive index than the light transmitting member in the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the outer edge member is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Light can be easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily made to reach the reflecting portion, so the light reflected from the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the pattern and design are clear. It can be raised (displayed).

  That is, for example, when the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are formed of the same refractive index material, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is not easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. It is easy to be transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) at the outer surface (boundary with air) of the outer edge portion and then returns to the light transmitting member, but the light returned from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member. Includes not only those that travel in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member but also those that travel in the direction toward the side end face of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light that reaches the reflecting portion is reduced. On the other hand, like the gaming machine A4, the outer edge member is formed of a material having a refractive index smaller than that of the light transmission member, so that the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmission member can be converted into the light transmission member and the outer edge member. Can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected), and thus light reaching the reflecting portion can be secured.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A5, the outer edge member is disposed in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine A6, the outer edge member is arranged in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member in the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A5. Light incident from the side end face of the light transmissive member can be easily reflected on the front surface or the back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmissive member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily made to reach the reflecting portion, so the light reflected from the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the pattern and design are clear. It can be raised (displayed).

  That is, for example, when the refractive index of the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are the same or the difference in refractive index is relatively small, if the light transmitting member and the outer edge member are in close contact, the side end surface of the light transmitting member The incident light is not easily reflected at the boundary between the light transmitting member and the outer edge member, and is easily transmitted to the outer edge member. The light transmitted to the outer edge member is totally reflected (or partially reflected) at the outer surface (boundary with air) of the outer edge portion and then returns to the light transmitting member, but the light returned from the outer edge member to the light transmitting member. Includes not only those that travel in the direction toward the reflecting portion of the light transmitting member but also those that travel in the direction toward the side end face of the light transmitting member. Therefore, the light that reaches the reflecting portion is reduced. On the other hand, like the gaming machine A5, the outer edge member is disposed in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, so that the light is incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member. Can be easily reflected (or can be totally reflected) on the front surface or the back surface (boundary with air) of the light transmitting member, so that the light reaching the reflecting portion can be secured.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the light transmission member is rotatably supported and includes a rotation mechanism that applies a rotational driving force to the light transmission member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. A curved rack gear is engraved along the circumferential direction of the annular outer peripheral surface or inner peripheral surface, and the rotating mechanism rotates and drives the pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member. A gaming machine A7 comprising a driving means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A2 to A6, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape and along the circumferential direction of the annular outer peripheral surface or inner peripheral surface. The curved rack gear is engraved, and the rotation mechanism includes a pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member and a driving means for rotationally driving the pinion gear. The rotation of the pinion gear can be transmitted to the outer edge member via the curved rack gear, whereby the light transmitting member can be rotated together with the outer edge member. Therefore, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member in a displaced (rotated) state.

  In this case, the outer edge member has both the role of condensing the light emitted from the light irradiating means on the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the light transmitting member and rotating it. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly, and the product cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved along with the simplification of the structure.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A7, the light transmission member is rotatably supported and includes a rotation mechanism that applies a rotational driving force to the light transmission member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that a guide groove is recessed along the circumferential direction of the annular outer peripheral surface, and the rotating mechanism includes a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide groove.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A7, the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and the guide groove is formed along the circumferential direction of the outer circumferential surface of the annular shape. Since the concave rotation mechanism includes a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide grooves, the side end surfaces of the light transmitting member are exposed by the action of the guide grooves and the support rings, that is, the light The light transmissive member can be rotatably supported in a state where light can be incident from the side end face of the transmissive member. Therefore, by rotating the light transmissive member, the player can visually recognize the pattern or symbol displayed by the light emitted from the front surface of the light transmissive member in a displaced (rotated) state.

  In this case, since the light irradiated from the light irradiating means can be concentrated on the side end surface of the light transmitting member and the role of rotatably supporting the light transmitting member together with the support wheel can be used as the outer edge member. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced and the reliability can be improved by simplifying the structure.

  The support wheel may be rotatably supported, or may be fixed so as not to rotate. In this case, as a form in which the support wheel is guided along the guide groove, a form in which the support wheel rotatably supported rolls along the guide groove or rolls while sliding, or cannot rotate. A configuration in which the fixed support wheel slides along the guide groove is exemplified.

  In addition, in the gaming machine A8 that is subordinate to the gaming machine A7, the outer edge member on which the curved rack gear is engraved is provided on one of the front and rear surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the outer edge member on which the guide groove is provided is provided on the light transmitting member. It is preferable to arrange each on the other of the front or the back. That is, by arranging the outer edge members on the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, the light irradiated from the light irradiating means is not directly incident on the side end surface of the light transmitting member, and the front surface of the light transmitting member. This is because each of the light deviating to the side and the light deviating to the back side can be reflected by the front outer edge member and the rear outer edge member, respectively, and incident from the side end face of the light transmitting member. In addition, as described above, the outer edge member is disposed on each of the front surface and the back surface of the light transmission member, so that light emitted from other devices in the game area reaches from either the front surface or the back surface of the light transmission member. Even in this case, the outer edge member on the front surface and the outer edge member on the rear surface can block each other, and the incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine A8, the outer edge member is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral side faces the front surface or the rear surface of the light transmitting member with a predetermined interval, and the gap between the outer edge member and the light transmitting member is the guide. A gaming machine A9 characterized by being a groove.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A8, the outer edge member is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral side faces the front or back surface of the light transmitting member with a predetermined interval therebetween, and the outer edge member and the light transmitting member Since the space between the two is a guide groove, it is possible to reduce the size of the structure including the light transmitting member and the outer edge member. That is, it is not necessary to form the outer edge member in a U-shaped cross section by bearing one inner wall of the guide groove on the front or back surface of the light transmitting member, and the thickness dimension of the outer edge member can be reduced. Therefore, the size of the structure described above can be reduced accordingly.

  Further, since the outer edge member is disposed in a state where a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface and the back surface of the light transmitting member, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member is transmitted to the front surface of the light transmitting member. Or it can be easily reflected on the back (boundary with air). As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily made to reach the reflecting portion, so the light reflected from the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the pattern and design are clear. It can be raised (displayed).

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A9, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is formed orthogonal to the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiation means has an irradiation direction of light from the irradiation surface. A gaming machine A10, wherein the irradiation surface is disposed so as to face the side end surface of the light transmitting member in a posture orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A2 to A9, the side end surface of the light transmitting member is formed orthogonal to the front and back surfaces of the light transmitting member, and the light irradiation means Since the irradiation surface is arranged so that the irradiation direction of the light from the surface is orthogonal to the side end surface of the light transmission member and facing the side end surface of the light transmission member, the side end surface of the light transmission member irradiated from the light irradiation means Can be easily reflected on the front surface or the back surface of the light transmitting member. As a result, the light incident from the side end surface of the light transmitting member can be easily made to reach the reflecting portion, so the light reflected from the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member is strengthened, and the pattern and design are clear. It can be raised (displayed).

<About the concept of the invention taking the irradiation unit 650 of the projection unit 600 as an example>
A gaming machine comprising: a target member to be irradiated with light; and a plurality of light emitting means distributed around the target member in a posture in which each irradiation surface faces the target member. And at least two or more of the light emitting means are mounted, and one or a plurality of substrate members formed to be elastically deformable, and a base member that holds the substrate members in a predetermined posture elastically deformed. Characteristic gaming machine B1.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine including a target member to be irradiated with light, and a plurality of light emitting units each arranged in a posture in which the irradiation surface is directed to the target member (for example, JP-A-2015 2015). -29735). According to this gaming machine, by irradiating light from the light emitting means and making it incident from the outer peripheral surface of the target member, the incident light travels inside the light transmitting member and is reflected by the reflecting portion. The light can be emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member. In this case, the applicant of the present invention forms the target member in a disk shape from the light-transmitting material and forms the reflection portion, while the plurality of light emitting means are irradiated on the outer peripheral surface of the disk shape (target member). The structure which arrange | positions so that the circumference | surroundings of a target member may be surrounded in the attitude | position which faced, and inject | emitted the light irradiated from each light emission means from the outer peripheral surface of a target member was devised (it is unknown at the time of this-application application).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, it has been newly found that there is a problem in that it takes a lot of time and labor to arrange a plurality of light emitting means around the target member. In particular, since the plurality of light emitting means need to be arranged in a posture in which each irradiation surface faces the outer peripheral surface of the target member (that is, each has a different orientation), the labor of the arrangement work also increases from this point. .

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, at least two or more light emitting means are mounted and one or a plurality of board members formed elastically deformable, and the board members are held in a predetermined posture elastically deformed. Therefore, by disposing one substrate member on the base member, the disposition work of at least two or more light emitting means can be completed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the labor for arranging the light emitting means.

  Further, when the substrate member is disposed on the base member, the substrate member is held in a predetermined posture that is elastically deformed, so that the direction of the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be defined. That is, since it is not necessary to dispose the plurality of light emitting means in a posture in which their irradiation surfaces are individually directed toward the outer peripheral surface of the target member, it is possible to suppress the labor of disposing the light emitting means from this point.

  In the gaming machine B1, a gaming machine B2 comprising a block body that is formed to be higher in rigidity than the board member and disposed on the board member, and the block body is held by the base member.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the block body is formed with higher rigidity than the board member and disposed on the board member, and the block body is held by the base member. Further, it is possible to easily regulate the posture of the substrate member by suppressing the warpage and the bending of the substrate member. As a result, the posture of the light emitting means can be suppressed from being affected by the warping or bending of the substrate member, and the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction and the orientation can be easily maintained.

  In the gaming machine B2, the light emitting means is disposed in a region of the board member where the block body is disposed.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, the light emitting means is disposed in the region of the board member where the block body is disposed. And the influence of bending can be more reliably suppressed. Therefore, the irradiation surface of the light emitting means can be directed in an appropriate direction, and the orientation can be more easily maintained.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, a plurality of the block bodies are arranged on the board member at a predetermined interval, and the base member is positioned in a posture in which the board members positioned between the block bodies are elastically deformed. A gaming machine B4 that is held by the body.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2 or B3, a plurality of block bodies are arranged on the board member at a predetermined interval, and the board members located between the block bodies are elastic. Since the base body is held in a deformed (bent) posture, the posture of the light emitting means (the direction of the irradiation surface) is stabilized as compared with the case where the substrate member in the elastically deformed posture is directly held by the base member. be able to.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the light emitting means is disposed in front of the substrate member facing the target member, and the block body is disposed on the opposite side of the target member. A gaming machine B5, which is arranged on the back surface.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B2 to B4, the light emitting means is disposed in front of the board member facing the target member, and the block body is on the side opposite to the target member. Therefore, the light emitting means can be brought closer to the target member while obtaining the effect of stabilizing the posture of the substrate member by the block body.

  In the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by screws from the front of the board member, and the head of the screws protrudes from the front of the board member.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by screws from the front of the board member, and the heads of the screws protrude from the front of the board member. Can be protected by screw head. That is, for example, when the movable member is displaced to the front surface of the substrate member, it is possible to prevent the screw head from coming into contact with the member and the light emitting means from being damaged.

  In the gaming machine B6, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is disposed between the heads of the two screws.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the block body is fastened and fixed by at least two screws, and the light emitting means is disposed between the heads of the two screws. The light emitting means can be easily protected by the head of the screw.

  The two screws are preferably arranged along the displacement direction of the movable member. This is because by arranging the light emitting means between the screw heads arranged in this manner, the movable member can be easily brought into contact with the screw head, and the light emitting means can be easily protected.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B7, a protrusion is provided on one of the base body or the block body, and a fitting hole for receiving the protrusion is fitted into the other of the base body or the block body. A gaming machine B8, characterized in that it is recessed.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B2 to B7, a protrusion is provided on one of the base body and the block body, and the fitting is received and fitted to the protrusion. Since the hole is recessed in the other of the base body or the block body, the block body can be disposed on the base body by fitting the protrusion into the fitting hole, and the labor of the disposing operation can be suppressed. . In particular, when a plurality of block bodies are arranged on a substrate member and are arranged in a posture in which the block bodies are elastically deformed (bent), one block body is positioned (temporarily fixed) by fitting. ), The substrate member can be elastically deformed (bent), and the work can be performed in such a manner that the other block body is fitted, so that the workability of the arrangement work can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the block body includes a recess on a surface disposed on the substrate member, and an electronic component disposed on the substrate member is accommodated in the recess of the block body. A gaming machine B9, which is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in any of the gaming machines B2 to B8, the block body is provided with a concave portion on the surface disposed on the substrate member, and is disposed on the substrate member in the concave portion of the block body. Since the electronic component is accommodated, the electronic component can be covered and protected by the block body. Therefore, for example, it is possible to avoid the movable member coming into contact with the electronic component and being damaged.

<Concept of Invention Taking Vertical Displacement Unit 800 as an Example>
A game comprising a base member, a displacement member disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable between a first position and a second position, and driving means for applying a driving force to the displacement member to displace it. The apparatus includes an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member moves from the first position to the second position by the action of gravity. In a state where it is disposed on the base member in a form displaced in the direction, and the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, A gaming machine C1 in which gravity acting on the displacement member and an elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced.

  Here, a base member, a displacement member that is disposed on the base member so as to be displaceable between the first position and the second position, and a driving means that applies a driving force to the displacement member to displace it. There is known a gaming machine that provides an effect by displacement of a displacement member (for example, JP 2011-239870 A). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is disposed at a retracted position (for example, one of the first position and the second position) that is not visible to the player or is located on the outer edge side of the game area, while the predetermined game When the state is formed, the displacement member is displaced toward the overhang position (the other of the first position and the second position) projecting into the game area, and the operation of the displacement member displaced toward the overhang position is played. An effect to make the person visually recognize is performed. However, in the gaming machine described above, the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the drive means, and the displacement member is displaced at a constant displacement speed, so it is difficult to cause the displacement member to perform an interesting displacement. There was a problem that there was.

  In contrast, the gaming machine C1 includes an elastic member that is elastically deformed as the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position, and the displacement member is moved from the first position by the action of gravity. In a state where it is disposed on the base member in a form that is displaced in the direction toward the second position and the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released, at a predetermined position between the first position and the second position, Since the gravity acting on the displacement member balances with the elastic recovery force of the elastic member, reciprocal displacement (approximately simple vibration) is caused by the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member around this balance position (predetermined position). ) Can be performed by the displacement member. In other words, the displacement of the displacement member in the direction of gravity can be an orthogonal projection motion of a constant velocity circular motion, and the displacement speed can be changed, so that the displacement member can be subjected to an interesting displacement.

  On the other hand, if a driving force is applied from the driving means to the displacement member, the displacement member is displaced between the first position and the second position in a manner different from the above-described displacement (orthographic projection motion of constant velocity circular motion). The variation of displacement can be increased accordingly. That is, it is possible to increase the variation of displacement only by switching whether or not to apply the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member, and it is not necessary to complicate the structure and control. Improvement.

  In the gaming machine C1, the displacement member is formed such that one end side is rotatably supported by the base member and the other end side is moved up and down between the first position and the second position. Game machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, one end side is rotatably supported by the base member, and the other end side is moved up and down between the first position and the second position. This is necessary when releasing the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member and causing the displacement member to perform reciprocal displacement (approximately simple vibration) due to the action of gravity and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member. The displacement of the other end of the displacement member can be a combination of not only a linear motion in the vertical direction but also a rotational motion centered on one end side. As a result, it is possible to cause the displacement member to perform an interesting displacement.

  The gaming machine C2 includes transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the transmission means is rotatably disposed on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means. And a connecting member having one end rotatably connected to a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member and the other end rotatably connected to the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the transmission means is arranged to be rotatable on the base member and rotated by the driving force of the driving means, and is eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member. And a connecting member whose one end is connected to the displaced member and the other end is connected to the displacing member, so that the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacing member is released, the action of gravity and the elastic recovery of the elastic member When reciprocal displacement (approximately simple vibration) by force is performed on the displacement member, the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member. Since the attitude of the connecting member is changed, the magnitude of the force component in the direction in which the rotating member is rotated out of the force in the push-pull direction can be changed. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced, the magnitude of the resistance that the displacement member receives from the transmission means can be changed, and as a result, the displacement speed of the reciprocation displacement of the displacement member can be changed, Such a displacement member can have an interesting displacement.

  In the gaming machine C3, in the predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the rotation center of the rotating member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member are connected. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that a direction connecting the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member is substantially orthogonal.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, at a predetermined position where the gravity acting on the displacement member and the elastic recovery force of the elastic member are balanced, the rotation center of the rotating member and the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member The direction connecting the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member is substantially orthogonal to the direction connecting the connecting member and the connecting member and the displacement member. The magnitude of the force component can be maximized at the balance position (predetermined position), and the force component can be reduced when going from the balance position in either direction of push-pull. That is, when the displacement member is reciprocally displaced, the resistance received by the displacement member from the transmission means can be changed substantially symmetrically with respect to the balance position, so that the reciprocation of the displacement member can be easily continued.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating member or the connecting member includes a projecting portion projecting toward the other, and the predetermined position in the movable range between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced in the central range including the protruding portion, the projecting portion is not opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, and the first position or the second position is more than the central range. The gaming machine C5 is characterized in that when the displacement member is displaced in an outer range close to, the projecting portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to come into contact therewith.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3 or C4, one of the rotating member or the connecting member includes a projecting portion that projects toward the other, and is between the first position and the second position. When the displacement member is displaced within the central range including the predetermined position of the movable range, the projecting portion is not opposed to the other of the rotating member or the coupling member, and the first position or When the displacement member is displaced in the outer range close to the second position, the projecting portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member, so that the application of the driving force from the driving means to the displacement member is released. When the displacement member is caused to reciprocate around the balance position (predetermined position), the reciprocating displacement of the displacement member is smoothed by avoiding the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the protruding portion in the central range. While the driving force of the driving means can be When displacing the displacement member more, the protruding portion is opposed to the other of the rotating member or the connecting member so as to be able to come into contact with the other in the outer range, and rattling between the rotating member and the connecting member can be suppressed. .

  In the gaming machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central range, and the central range is set to a range including the predetermined position and the second position. A gaming machine C6 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C5, the outer range is set closer to the first position than the central range, and the central range includes a predetermined position and a second position. Therefore, in the state where the displacement member is displaced to the first position, the posture of the displacement member can be changed by suppressing the rattling between the rotating member and the connecting member using the protruding portion. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced from the first position to the second position by the driving force of the driving means, it is possible to avoid the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion, so that it acts on the displacement member. The displacement member can be smoothly displaced while using gravity.

  For example, when the first position is a retracted position where the displacement member is retracted to the outer edge side of the game area, and the second position is an extended position where the displacement member is projected toward the center side of the game area. In the first position (retracted position), it is possible to suppress the rattling of the displacement member to improve the appearance and durability, and to inhibit the effects of other members from being disturbed. Can be quickly projected (displaced) to the second position when the first position is displaced from the first position to the second position (projected position), and the effect of the projecting operation can be enhanced. .

  In the gaming machine C6, in the second position, the rotation center of the rotation member, the connection position of the rotation member and the connection member, and the connection position of the connection member and the displacement member are positioned substantially in a straight line. A gaming machine C7.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6, in the second position, the rotation center of the rotating member, the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member, and the connecting position of the connecting member and the displacement member are substantially straight. Since the displacement member pushes and pulls the connecting member to rotate the rotating member, the pushing and pulling direction becomes the direction toward the rotation center of the rotating member, and the force component in the direction of rotating the rotating member is A state that does not occur (ie, dead center) can be formed. Therefore, when the displacement member is displaced toward the second position, it is possible to avoid the generation of resistance due to the sliding of the projecting portion, and to smoothly (rapidly) displace the displacement member, while the second After being arranged at the position, the above-described dead point can suppress the rattling of the displacement member, thereby improving the appearance and improving the durability.

  In any one of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the connecting member includes a contact portion formed so as to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion is connected to the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member and the rotation. It is on a substantially straight line connecting the connecting position of the member and the connecting member, and is disposed on the opposite side of the connecting position of the displacement member and the base member across the connecting position of the rotating member and the connecting member. Game machine C8.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the connecting member includes a contact portion formed so as to be able to contact the base member, and the contact portion includes the displacement member and the base. It is on a substantially straight line connecting the connection position of the member and the connection position of the rotation member and the connection member, and is disposed on the opposite side of the connection position of the displacement member and the base member across the connection position of the rotation member and the connection member. When the displacement member shakes against the base member, the rotating member and the connecting portion of the connecting member (the rotating member and one end of the connecting member can rotate by the contact portion of the connecting member coming into contact with the base member. It is possible to easily suppress the inclination of the rotation axis with respect to the shaft support hole of the portion connected to the shaft. As a result, the driving force of the driving means can be smoothly transmitted to the displacement member via the transmitting means.

<Concept of Invention with Displacement Unit 400 as an Example>
In a gaming machine comprising a base member, a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, and a drive unit that applies a drive force to the displacement member, the drive unit includes a first drive unit, a first drive unit, And a case where the displacement member is displaced by a driving force applied from the first driving unit, and a case where the displacement member is displaced by a driving force applied from the second driving unit. In the gaming machine D1, the displacement member is displaced in a different manner.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine that includes a base member, a displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, and a driving unit that applies a driving force to the displacement member, and performs an effect by displacement of the displacement member. (For example, JP 2011-239870 A). In this case, for example, in a normal state, the displacement member is disposed at a retracted position that is not visible to the player or on the outer edge side of the game area, and when a predetermined game state is formed, the tension member that protrudes to the game area is formed. An effect is produced in which the displacement member is displaced toward the extended position and the player visually recognizes the movement of the displaced member that is displaced toward the extended position.

  However, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that the effect of the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member is insufficient. Specifically, in the conventional gaming machine, the displacement mode of the displacement member (the trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to a single pattern, so that the effect due to the displacement of the displacement member is one pattern As a result, it was difficult to produce a player's intention. Even if the driving force of the driving means is varied to provide a change, the displacement speed of the displacement member only increases and decreases, and the displacement mode (trajectory) remains constant, so that the player's intention can be expressed. It was difficult to do.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the driving means includes the first driving means and the second driving means, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the first driving means, Since the displacement member is displaced in a different manner depending on the case where the displacement member is displaced by the driving force applied from the two drive means, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect by the displacement of the displacement member. That is, unlike the conventional product in which the displacement mode of the displacement member (the trajectory when the displacement member is displaced with respect to the base member) is limited to one pattern, the production is not one pattern, and at least two displacement members are used. Since it can be displaced in the same manner of displacement, it is possible to produce an effect that makes a player's intention by switching the displacement manner.

  In the gaming machine D1, the first member is slidably disposed on the base member and driven by the first driving means, and the second driving means is slidably disposed on the base member. And a second member driven by the first and second parts of the displacement member, wherein the first member and the second member are at least rotatably coupled to the first member and the second member, respectively. .

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, the base member is slidably disposed and the first member driven by the first driving means, and the base member is slidably disposed. And a second member driven by the second driving means, and the first part and the second part of the displacement member are connected to the first member and the second member, respectively, at least rotatably. When the first member is slid and displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the second portion side can be formed, while the second driving force of the second driving means causes the second member to rotate. When the member is slidably displaced, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated around the first portion side can be formed. In other words, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two different displacement modes, it is possible to produce an effect that gives a player's intention by switching the displacement modes.

  In particular, according to the gaming machine D2, the two displacement modes are not formed by making the rotation center the same and making the rotation direction different, but forming the rotation directions different and the rotation centers different. Therefore, the change of the displacement mode of the displacement member can be increased, and it is possible to easily perform an effect that makes the player's intention.

  In the gaming machine D2, the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and a connecting pin protruding from one of the first portion of the displacement member or the first member is provided. A gaming machine D3 that is rotatably and slidably inserted into a guide groove formed on the other side.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, the first member and the second member are disposed on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, and either the first part of the displacement member or the first member Since the connecting pin protruding from the second guide member is rotatably and slidably inserted into the guide groove formed on the other side, the first member is linearly displaced by the driving force of the first driving unit or the driving force of the second driving unit Depending on whether or not the second member is displaced linearly, a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated about the second portion side and a displacement mode in which the entire displacement member is rotated about the first portion side are formed. it can. In other words, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least two different displacement modes, it is possible to produce an effect that gives a player's intention by switching the displacement modes.

  In this case, since the first member and the second member are arranged on the base member so as to be linearly displaceable, it is not necessary to have a complicated structure as in the case of sliding displacement with a curved locus (with a curved locus). In that case, it is necessary to provide not only a mechanism for guiding the first member and the second member in a curved shape, but also a mechanism for continuously applying a driving force to the first member and the second member that are displaced in a curved shape. For example, a rack and pinion mechanism can be used, and the structure can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the product cost and improve durability and operation reliability.

  In the gaming machine D3, the gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the linear displacement direction of the first member and the linear displacement direction of the second member are substantially parallel.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D3, the direction of the linear displacement of the first member and the direction of the linear displacement of the second member are substantially parallel. In addition to a displacement mode in which only one of the drive means is driven to rotate the entire displacement member, both the first drive means and the second drive means are driven to linearly displace (for example, traverse) the entire displacement member. Embodiments can be formed. In other words, since one displacement member can be displaced in at least three different displacement modes, it is possible to make it easy to produce a player's intention by switching such displacement modes.

  In particular, according to the gaming machine D4, as the displacement mode of the displacement member, the type of displacement (rotation) is the same, but in addition to the direction of rotation and the position of the center of rotation being different, the type of displacement itself is different. (That is, rotation and linear displacement can be formed), the change of the displacement mode of the displacement member can be further increased, and the effect of giving the player's intention can be further facilitated.

  In the gaming machine D4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the displacement speed of the second member are different. A gaming machine D5 characterized by being speeded.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D4, when the first member and the second member are driven by the first driving means and the second driving means, respectively, the displacement speed of the first member and the second Since the displacement speed is different from the displacement speed of the member, the displacement of the displacement member can include rotational motion and linear motion. That is, the displacement member can be not only displaced (linear motion) in parallel with the linear displacement direction of the first member and the second member while maintaining the posture, but can also be linearly moved while rotating the posture. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy to produce a player's intention.

  It should be noted that it is impossible to displace the displacement member in a displacement manner combining such rotational motion and linear motion in the conventional configuration in which the displacement member is slid along the slide groove with the driving force of one driving means. As in the present invention, it is possible to use two driving means for the first time.

  Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5 includes a second displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, and when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means, the displacement While the second displacement member is displaced together with the member, the second displacement member is maintained in a stopped state when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second driving means. Game machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the gaming machine D6 includes the second displacement member that is displaceably disposed on the base member, and the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the first driving means. When the displacement member is moved, the second displacement member is displaced together with the displacement member. On the other hand, when the displacement member is displaced by the driving force of the second drive means, the second displacement member is maintained in the stopped state. The apparatus (change) of the displacement mode by the first drive unit and the displacement mode by the second drive unit can be increased. Therefore, by switching such a displacement mode, it is possible to make it easier to produce a player's intention.

<Concept of Invention with Projection Unit 5600 as an Example>
In a gaming machine including a target member to be irradiated with light and a light irradiation means for irradiating light toward the target member, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are formed to be displaceable. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that an irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means is changed by the one or both displacements.

  Here, a game that includes a displacement member formed to be displaceable between the first position and the second position, and a drive unit that applies a driving force to the displacement member to displace it, and performs an effect by the displacement of the displacement member. The machine is known (for example, JP, 2011-239870, A). In this gaming machine, light irradiating means (LED) is disposed inside the displacement member, and a translucent portion made of a light transmissive material is provided on the front surface (player side surface) of the displacement member. By irradiating the light part from the back surface with the light irradiating means, the player can visually recognize the form in which a part of the displacement member (the light transmitting part) emits light. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the irradiation mode of the target member is constant by the light irradiation means, there is a problem that the mode of visual recognition by the player is scarce and it is difficult to have interest.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, at least one or both of the target member and the light irradiation means are formed to be displaceable, and the irradiation mode of the target member by the light irradiation means is changed by the displacement of one or both, The aspect visually recognized by the player can be changed. As a result, it is easy to give the player interest.

  In addition, as the form in which the light irradiation mode is changed, for example, the form in which the position of the target member irradiated by the light irradiation unit is changed, or the distance from the irradiation surface of the light irradiation unit to the irradiation position of the target member is changed. And the combination of these are exemplified.

  The gaming machine E1, comprising a base member, wherein the light irradiating means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is displaceably disposed on the base member.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the light irradiation means is fixed to the base member, and the target member is disposed displaceably on the base member. The target wiring can be fixed, and the occurrence of disconnection can be suppressed accordingly.

  The gaming machine E2 includes a shielding member that has an opening and is disposed on the base member, and allows a player to visually recognize a part of the target member from the opening of the shielding member. Formed in a plate shape from a transmissive material and provided with a reflection portion, the light irradiated from the light irradiation means and incident from the side end face is reflected by the reflection portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member. A gaming machine E3 characterized by

  Here, the reflecting portion includes a plurality of groups each composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces, and each group forms a pattern or a pattern. Therefore, the player can recognize the light reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member as a pattern or a pattern.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the gaming machine E3 includes a shielding member that has an opening and is disposed on the base member, and allows the player to visually recognize a part of the target member from the opening of the shielding member. By displacing the target member, the player can visually recognize different portions of the target member from the opening of the shielding member.

  For example, a first position in which a first group of a plurality of groups constituting the reflecting portion is visible through the opening, and a second group that is a group different from the first group is the opening. When the target member is displaceable between the second position that can be visually recognized via the first member, the first member can be disposed through the opening of the shielding member by arranging the target member at the first position. While allowing the player to visually recognize the first pattern or design to be formed, the pattern or design to be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member by displacing the target member from the first position to the second position. The second pattern or the pattern formed by the second group can be changed.

  In this case, since the target member is formed of a light transmissive material, when the target member is displaced in order to change a pattern or a pattern visually recognized by the player, light from the light irradiation means is not irradiated. This makes it difficult for the player to recognize that the target member is displaced.

  In the gaming machine E3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape when viewed from the front, and is disposed on the base member so as to be rotatable about the center of the circular shape or the annular shape. A gaming machine E4.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine E3, the target member is formed in a circular shape or an annular shape when viewed from the front, and the base member can be rotated around the center of the circular shape or the annular shape. Therefore, as compared with the case where the target member is slidable, the target member is disposed while ensuring the number of patterns and symbols to be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the shielding member. The space required for this can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine E2, the target member is formed from a light-transmitting material in a circular plate shape in front view and includes a reflection portion, and the light irradiated from the light irradiation means and incident from the side end surface is received. The light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the target member, and a plurality of the light irradiating means are dispersedly arranged around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface faces the side end surface of the target member. The gaming machine E5 is characterized in that the target member is rotatably disposed on the base member with the circular center as a rotation center.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E6, the target member is formed in a circular plate shape from a light-transmitting material and is provided with a reflective portion, and is irradiated from the light irradiation means and from the side end surface. The incident light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member, and a plurality of light irradiation means are distributed around the target member in a posture in which the irradiation surface faces the side end surface of the target member. Therefore, by rotating the target member while irradiating light from the light irradiation means, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the target member in a rotated state. it can.

  In the gaming machine E5, the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed in the circumferential direction at positions equidistant from the rotation center of the target member.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine E5, the plurality of light irradiation means are distributed in the circumferential direction at positions that are equidistant from the rotation center of the target member. Regardless of the phase, the light emitted from the front of the target member can be easily made constant. That is, it is possible to stably form a pattern or a pattern displayed by light emitted from the front surface of the target member.

  The gaming machine E1, comprising a base member, wherein the light irradiating means and the target member are displaceably disposed on the base member.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the light irradiating means and the target member are displaceably disposed on the base member. Variations in changes in the irradiation mode can be increased. Therefore, the aspect visually recognized by the player can be changed, and the player can be easily provided with interest.

  The gaming machine E7 includes a driving unit that applies a driving force to the target member to displace the target member, and the light irradiation unit abuts the target member that is displaced by the driving force applied from the driving unit. Thus, the gaming machine E8 is displaced together with the target member.

  According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E7, the gaming machine E8 includes a driving unit that applies a driving force to the target member to displace the target member, and the light irradiation unit is a target that is displaced by the driving force applied from the driving unit. Since the member is abutted and displaced together with the target member, it can also be used as a driving means for displacing the target member, and there is no need to separately provide a driving means for displacing the light irradiation means. it can.

<Concept of Invention with Projection Unit 7600 as an Example>
One light transmissive member, comprising: a light transmissive member formed of a light transmissive material and having a reflective portion; and light emitting means disposed around the light transmissive member with an irradiation surface facing the reflective portion. A plurality of the light emitting means are disposed in a state where an irradiation surface is directed to each of the reflection parts, or a plurality of the light transmitting members are arranged in parallel, and the plurality of the light transmitting members are arranged. The light emitting means is arranged one or more at a time with the irradiation surface facing the side end surface of the member, and the light incident from the periphery of the light transmitting member is reflected by the plurality of reflecting portions, and the front surface of the light transmitting member A gaming machine F1 comprising: a display distance changing unit that changes a reflection position of light reflected by the plurality of reflecting portions in a front or back direction of the light transmitting member.

  Here, a light transmissive member formed of a light transmissive material and having a plurality of reflecting portions arranged in parallel in the front or back direction, and disposed around the light transmissive member with the irradiation surface facing the reflecting portions. There is known a gaming machine that includes a plurality of light emitting means and reflects light incident from the periphery of the light transmitting member by a plurality of reflecting portions and emits the light from the front surface of the light transmitting member (for example, JP 2009-207880 A). Issue gazette). Each reflecting portion is provided with a plurality of groups composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces, and each group forms a pattern or a pattern. Therefore, the player can recognize the light emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member as a pattern or a pattern. Further, in this gaming machine, two light transmitting members are arranged side by side, and the light irradiated from the two light irradiation means disposed with the irradiation surface facing the reflecting portion formed on each light transmitting member. By reflecting the pattern, it is possible to display a pattern or a pattern on each light transmitting member. Accordingly, when the light transmitting member is switched on or off and a pattern or a pattern is displayed on one of the two light transmitting members, both on the two light transmitting members. It is possible to switch between displaying a pattern and a pattern.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the display of one or the other of the two light transmissive members is turned on / off, or the display of both light transmissive members is turned on / off. The display of the light transmitting member cannot be switched. For this reason, there is a problem that it is not possible to enhance the effect produced by the display of the light transmitting member.

  On the other hand, since the gaming machine F1 includes display distance changing means for changing the reflection position of the light reflected by the plurality of reflection parts in the front or back direction of the light transmission member, the light reflected by each reflection part. The distance between the reflection positions can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to change the distance between the patterns and symbols reflected by the respective reflecting portions and displayed on the light transmission member. Therefore, it is possible to change the display mode of the pattern and the pattern visually recognized by the player. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the pattern or design displayed on the light transmissive member, and it is possible to enhance the effect produced by displaying the light transmissive member.

  For example, when the distance between the patterns and symbols displayed on each light transmitting member is changed between a first distance that is a predetermined distance away and a second distance that is smaller than the first distance, The direction displayed at the first distance is more likely to be related to the jackpot of the gaming machine. In this case, the player can check whether the pattern or pattern displayed on the light transmitting member is the first distance or the second distance, thereby determining whether or not it is a big hit variation. Can be. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily pay attention to the pattern or design displayed on the light transmissive member, and it is possible to enhance the effect produced by displaying the light transmissive member.

  Also, for example, when the player is viewing the 2 display at the same time and makes the player recognize the display in a three-dimensional manner, the player can select the interval between the 2 display surfaces to 3D display can be easily made visible to the player. In other words, stereoscopic display is less visible to the player due to the player's visual acuity, height, seated position or seated posture, etc., but the player can change the interval between the two display surfaces. This makes it easy for the player to visually recognize the three-dimensional display on the two display surfaces.

  Furthermore, since the gaming machine F1 includes display distance changing means for changing the reflection position of the light reflected by the plurality of reflection portions in the front or back direction of the light transmission member, the light reflection position (pattern) from the viewpoint of the player. And the distance to the symbol display surface) can be changed. Therefore, when the display surface of a pattern or design is placed near the player's viewpoint, the display of the pattern or design should be made much more visible to the player than when it is placed far from the player's viewpoint. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to change the display mode of patterns and symbols recognized by the player. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the pattern or design displayed on the light transmissive member, and it is possible to enhance the effect produced by displaying the light transmissive member.

  In the gaming machine F1, the light transmissive member is composed of a plurality of divided bodies arranged in parallel in the front or back direction of the light transmissive member, and the plurality of reflecting portions are at least one place in one of the divided bodies. The gaming machine F2 is characterized in that the light emitting means is formed one by one with the irradiation surface facing the side end surface of the one divided body.

  Here, in the case where a plurality of reflecting portions are formed on one light transmitting member and a plurality of light emitting means are disposed so that light can be irradiated to each reflecting portion, the direction from one light emitting means to one reflecting portion is directed. The reflected light is irradiated to other reflective parts other than the one reflective part, making it difficult to change the pattern or design displayed on the light transmissive member, and playing the pattern or design displayed on the light transmissive member. There is a problem that it becomes difficult for a person to visually recognize.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F1, the light transmitting member is composed of a plurality of divided bodies arranged in parallel in the front or back direction of the light transmitting member, and includes a plurality of reflecting portions. Are formed in at least one place on one divided body, and the light emitting means are arranged one by one with the irradiation surface facing the side end face of the one divided body, so that the light enters from one light emitting means to one divided body. It is possible to prevent the reflected light from being irradiated on the reflecting portion of the other divided body other than the one divided body. That is, since the light transmitting member is formed from a plurality of divided bodies, the light irradiated from one light emitting unit and incident on the one divided body can be totally reflected inside the one divided body, Thereby, it can suppress that the light irradiated from one light emission means injects into other divided bodies other than one divided body. As a result, the patterns and symbols displayed on the respective divided bodies can be easily changed, and the patterns and symbols displayed on the divided bodies can be easily recognized by the player.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the plurality of reflecting portions are formed in at least three or more locations of the light transmitting member, and are reflected on the plurality of reflecting portions by switching between irradiation or non-irradiation of the plurality of light emitting means. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the reflected position of the light to be changed is changed to the front or back direction of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the plurality of reflecting portions are formed in at least three locations of the light transmitting member, and the irradiation or non-irradiation of the plurality of light emitting means is switched. Since the reflection position of the light reflected by the plurality of reflection parts is changed in the front or back direction of the light transmitting member, the reflection position of the light reflected by the reflection part can be changed in the front or back direction. In this case, the distance between the reflection positions of the light reflected by the two reflecting portions can be changed by forming three or more reflecting portions. Therefore, since it is not necessary to provide a driving means for moving the reflecting portion, the structure can be simplified correspondingly, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the reliability of the product can be improved.

  In the gaming machine F3, the gaming machine F4 is characterized in that distance dimensions between the plurality of reflecting portions are set to different distances.

  Here, in the case where the distance dimensions between the plurality of reflecting portions are set equally, the same distance is set when changing the distance between the reflection positions of the light reflected by the plurality of reflecting portions. The For example, when three reflection portions are formed at equal intervals, the distance between the reflection positions of the light reflected by the first reflection portion and the second reflection portion and the second reflection And the distance between the reflection positions of the light reflected by the third reflecting portion and the third reflecting portion are the same.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F3, the distance dimensions between the plurality of reflecting portions are set to different distances, so that irradiation or non-irradiation of the light emitting means is switched. In this case, all the distances between the reflection positions of the light reflected by the plurality of reflecting portions can be set to different values. Therefore, even when the driving means for moving the reflecting portion is not provided, a variation in which the distance between the reflection positions of the light reflected by each reflecting portion is changed is set to a uniform distance between the reflecting portions. Can be more. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the pattern or design displayed on the light transmissive member, and it is possible to enhance the effect produced by displaying the light transmissive member.

  In the gaming machine F3 or F4, the one light emitting means disposed in one divided body is arranged in parallel with the light emitting means disposed in the divided body adjacent to the one divided body. A gaming machine F5, which is disposed at different positions in a direction orthogonal to the installation direction.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3 or F4, the one light emitting means disposed in one of the divided bodies is disposed in the divided body adjacent to the one divided body. Since the light emitting means and the divided bodies are arranged at different positions in the direction orthogonal to the parallel arrangement direction of the divided bodies, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging the light emitting means. Therefore, it can suppress that the separation distance of the reflection part arranged in parallel by the front or back direction of a light transmissive member is influenced by the arrangement | positioning space of a light emission means. As a result, the plurality of reflecting portions adjacent to each other in the front or back direction of the light transmitting member can be made as close as possible, so that the outer shape of the unit in the front or back direction of the light transmitting member can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine F2 or F3, the game machine F2 or F3 includes a driving unit that applies a driving force to the divided body, and at least one of the plurality of divided bodies is in a front or back direction of the light transmitting member by the driving unit. The light can be rotated around an axis extending in a direction orthogonal to the one, and by rotating one of the divided bodies, a reflection position of light reflected by the reflecting portion formed in the one divided body, and one The gaming machine F6 is characterized in that the distance from the reflection position of the light reflected by the reflecting portion formed in the other divided body other than the divided body is partially different.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F2 or 3, the driving device for applying a driving force to the divided body is provided, and at least one of the plurality of divided bodies is light-transmitted by the driving means. The reflection position of the light reflected by the reflecting portion formed in the one divided body by rotating around the axis extending in the direction orthogonal to the front or back direction of the member and rotating the one divided body And the distance away from the reflection position of the light reflected by the reflecting portion formed on the other divided body other than the one divided body is partially different from the pattern or design displayed on the one divided body. The distance away from the pattern or symbol displayed on the other divided body can be partially changed. Therefore, the variation of the display mode of the pattern and the pattern which a player visually recognizes can be increased. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the pattern or design displayed on the light transmissive member, and it is possible to enhance the effect produced by displaying the light transmissive member.

  The gaming machine F2 or F3 includes a driving unit that applies a driving force to the divided body, and the plurality of divided bodies center on an axis that extends in a direction orthogonal to the front or back direction of the light transmitting member by the driving unit. The rotation radius of each of the divided bodies is set to a different value, and each of the divided bodies is arranged on the front side by rotating each of the plurality of divided bodies. A gaming machine F7 that is displaced between a rotational position and a second rotational position arranged on the back side.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2 or F3, the gaming machine F7 includes driving means for applying a driving force to the divided body, and the plurality of divided bodies are orthogonal to the front or back direction of the light transmitting member by the driving means. The rotation radius of each divided body is set to a different value, and each divided body is arranged on the front side by rotating each of the divided bodies. When the pattern or pattern is displayed by the reflecting surface of one divided body, the other divisions other than the one divided body are displaced between the first rotated position and the second rotational position arranged on the back side. By arranging the body at a position between the first rotation position and the second rotation position, one divided body can be retracted from the direction connecting the player's viewpoint and one divided body. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the patterns and symbols displayed on one divided body.

  In this case, the other divided bodies other than the one divided body can be moved to the retracted position and the distance in the front or back direction can be changed only by rotating. Therefore, the structure of the drive means of a division body can be simplified. As a result, product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine F7, the plurality of divided bodies are arranged at two positions on the same rotation trajectory facing each other with the rotation center in between, and the gap between the two divided bodies is made of a non-permeable material. A gaming machine F8 that is formed and connected by a non-permeable member that is displaceable on the rotation trajectory of the divided body.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F7, the plurality of divided bodies are arranged at two positions on the same rotation trajectory facing each other with the center of rotation in between. Since the gap is formed of a non-permeable material and is connected by a non-permeable member that can be displaced on the rotation locus of the divided body, the inside of the rotation locus of the divided body can be darkened. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the light reflecting surface of the reflecting portion.

  In the gaming machine F8, the non-transparent member is provided with a reflecting member that reflects light on an end face located on the rotation center side of the divided body.

  Here, in the case where the divided body is moved between the first rotational position and the second rotational position by rotating around the axis, when the pattern or design displayed on the divided body is viewed from the player side, The display is reversed between the first rotation position and the second rotation position, and there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to read the patterns and symbols displayed on the divided body.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine F8, a reflecting member that reflects light is disposed on the end surface located on the rotation center side of the divided body, so that one rotation trajectory is provided. Of the two divided bodies to be arranged, the light reflected by the reflecting portion of the divided body arranged at the second rotation position can be reflected by the reflecting member and emitted to the player side. As a result, regardless of whether the divided body is arranged at the first rotational position or the second rotational position, it is possible to make it easier for the player to read the display of the pattern and the pattern displayed on the divided body.

  In the gaming machine F8 or F9, the light emitting means is arranged so as to be able to irradiate light in a direction orthogonal to the light emitting direction of the first light emitting member and the first light emitting member that irradiates one side end surface of the divided body. And a second light emitting member that irradiates the other side end face of the divided body, and the one divided body includes a first reflecting portion that reflects by irradiation of the first light emitting member, and the second light emitting member. A second reflecting portion that is reflected by irradiation of the light emitting member is formed, and when the divided body is disposed at the first rotation position, the light reflected by the first reflecting portion is front side of the light transmitting member. When the divided body is arranged at the second rotation position, the light reflected by the second reflecting portion is emitted to the back side of the light transmitting member.

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F8 or F9, the light emitting means includes a first light emitting member that irradiates one side end surface of the divided body, and a light irradiation direction of the first light emitting member. And a second light emitting member that irradiates the other side end surface of the divided body, and one divided body reflects the first light emitting member by the first light emitting member. And a second reflecting portion that is reflected by irradiation of the second light emitting member, and when the divided body is disposed at the first rotation position, the light reflected by the first reflecting portion is transmitted to the light transmitting member. When the divided body is emitted to the front side and is arranged at the second rotational position, the light reflected by the second reflecting portion is emitted to the back side of the light transmitting member, so that the divided body has the first rotational position. In the case of rotational displacement to the opposite position across the rotation axis at the second rotational position, light transmission is performed at each position. It is possible to change the patterns and symbols to be displayed in the wood. Therefore, when the divided body moves from the first rotation position to the second rotation position, it is possible to suppress the patterns and symbols displayed on the divided body from being in opposite directions. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the patterns and symbols displayed on the divided body.

  In the gaming machine F10, the first reflecting portion and the second reflecting portion are formed at positions where the divided bodies are opposed to each other.

  According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F10, the first reflecting portion and the second reflecting portion are formed at positions facing the divided body, so that they are reflected by the first reflecting portion and become the divided body. The displayed pattern or design and the pattern or design reflected on the divided body by the second reflecting portion can be displayed at the same position of the divided body viewed from the player side. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the patterns and symbols displayed on the divided body.

  In the gaming machine F8 to the gaming machine F12, the plurality of divided bodies are formed in an arc shape centering on a rotation axis of the plurality of divided bodies.

  According to the gaming machine F13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F8 to F12, the plurality of divided bodies are formed in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the plurality of divided bodies, so that a predetermined range in front view In addition, the display surface of the divided body can be maximized, and the displacement area when the divided body rotates can be minimized. As a result, it is easy for the player to visually recognize the display displayed on the divided body, and it is possible to secure a space for disposing other structures.

<Concept of Invention with Projection Unit 11600 as an Example>
A target member formed of a light transmissive material and having a reflecting portion; and a light irradiation means disposed around the target member with the irradiation surface directed to the target member, from a side end surface of the target member In the gaming machine in which incident light is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front of the target member, a plurality of the target members are arranged, and light from the light irradiation means is side end surfaces of the plurality of target members. A gaming machine G1 that is incident from the above.

  Here, a target member formed of a light-transmitting material and having a reflecting portion, and a light irradiation means disposed around the target member with the irradiation surface facing the target member, a side end surface of the target member There is known a gaming machine that reflects light incident from a reflecting portion and emits the light from the front of a target member (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-207880). According to this gaming machine, the reflecting portion is provided with a plurality of groups each composed of a plurality of reflecting surfaces, and each group forms a pattern or a pattern. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the front of the target member as a pattern or a pattern. Further, according to this gaming machine, two target members are arranged, and a plurality of light irradiation means are arranged around the target member, and one corresponding one of the two target members is provided by one light irradiation means. It arrange | positions in the state which can irradiate light only to an object member. Thereby, a pattern and a pattern can be displayed on both of two object members, and a player can visually recognize it.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in order to display a pattern or a pattern on two target members, it is necessary to provide light irradiation means for irradiating light to the corresponding target members. For this reason, there is a problem that a space for arranging the light irradiation means increases.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine G1, a plurality of target members are arranged, and the light of the light irradiating means is incident from the side end surfaces of the plurality of target members. By making it enter from the side end surface of a member, a pattern and a pattern can be displayed on a some target member. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a light irradiation means for each of the plurality of target members. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of light irradiating units disposed, and accordingly, it is possible to suppress an increase in space for the light irradiating unit.

  In the gaming machine G1, the plurality of target members are arranged side by side, and the light irradiation means is disposed between the target members disposed at both ends of the plurality of target members arranged side by side. A gaming machine G2.

  According to the gaming machine G2, the effect exerted by the gaming machine G1 is added, the plurality of target members are arranged in parallel, and the light irradiation means are disposed at both ends of the plurality of target members arranged in parallel. Since it arrange | positions between object members, it can suppress that the light irradiation means protrudes in the parallel arrangement direction of the several object member arranged in parallel. In addition, since it can suppress that a light irradiation means protrudes in the direction in which several target members are arranged in parallel, the external shape of the direction where the external shape becomes comparatively larger than other parts by arranging multiple target members in parallel is large. Can be suppressed. Thereby, it is possible to easily dispose a structure configured by combining a plurality of target members.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the target member includes an emission increasing unit that increases a ratio of light emitted from the front of the target member in light irradiated from the light irradiation unit. Machine G3.

  Here, when the light irradiated from one light irradiation means is incident from the side end surfaces of a plurality of target members, the light irradiated from the one light irradiation means is dispersed and incident from the side end surfaces of the respective target members. Therefore, the amount of light emitted from the front surface of the target member is reduced by the amount of light dispersed, and there is a problem that it is difficult for the player to recognize the pattern or design displayed on the target member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the target member increases the proportion of light emitted from the front of the target member out of the light emitted from the light irradiation means. Therefore, the light that is reflected by the reflecting portion and emitted from the front surface of the target member can be strengthened. As a result, it is possible to clearly display (display) the pattern or design, and to make it easier for the player to recognize the pattern or design displayed on the target member.

  In the gaming machine G3, the emission increasing means includes an outer edge member disposed along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the rear surface of the light transmission member, and both end portions in the juxtaposed direction among the plurality of target members. The gaming machine G4 is characterized in that the outer edge member is disposed on the outer side surface in the facing direction in the target member positioned in the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine G4, the emission increasing means includes an outer edge member arranged along at least one outer edge of the front surface or the rear surface of the light transmitting member, and is provided at both ends of the plurality of target members in the juxtaposed direction. Since the outer edge member is disposed on the outer side surface in the opposing direction in the target member that is positioned, the target members at both outer ends of the target members arranged in parallel can be disposed close to the adjacent target member. . As a result, when the player visually recognizes the patterns and symbols displayed on the adjacent target members at the same time, the distance between the displayed patterns and symbols can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the patterns and symbols displayed on the adjacent target members in a combined (combined) state.

  When two target members are arranged side by side, the outer edge member can be arranged outside the two target member members, so that the gap between the two target members facing each other is minimized. Can be set. This makes it easy for the player to visually recognize the patterns and symbols displayed on the two target members in a combined (combined) state.

  In the gaming machines G1 to G4, the target member is rotatably supported and provided with a rotation mechanism that applies a rotational driving force to the target member. The outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, A curved rack gear is engraved along the circumferential direction of the ring-shaped outer peripheral surface or inner peripheral surface, and the rotating mechanism includes a pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member, and a driving unit that rotationally drives the pinion gear. A gaming machine G5, comprising:

  According to the gaming machine G5, in the gaming machines G1 to G4, the target member is rotatably supported and provided with a rotation mechanism that applies a rotational driving force to the target member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. A curved rack gear is engraved along the circumferential direction of the annular outer peripheral surface or inner peripheral surface, and the rotation mechanism is a pinion gear meshed with the curved rack gear of the outer edge member, and a drive that rotationally drives the pinion gear Therefore, by rotating the pinion gear by the driving means, the rotation of the pinion gear can be transmitted to the outer edge member via the curved rack gear, whereby the target member can be rotated together with the outer edge member. Therefore, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the pattern or the pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front of the target member in a displaced (rotated) state.

  In this case, it is possible to make the outer edge member share the role of condensing the light emitted from the light irradiating means on the side end surface of the target member and the role of transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the target member for rotation. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced correspondingly, thereby reducing the product cost and improving the reliability associated with the simplification of the structure.

  The gaming machine G4 or G5 includes a rotation mechanism that rotatably supports the target member and applies a rotational driving force to the target member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape, and the annular shape A gaming machine G6, wherein a guide groove is recessed along the circumferential direction, and the rotation mechanism includes a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide groove.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G4 or G5, the gaming machine G6 includes a rotation mechanism that rotatably supports the target member and applies a rotational driving force to the target member, and the outer edge member is formed in an annular shape. In addition, the guide groove is recessed along the circumferential direction of the annular shape, and the rotation mechanism includes a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide groove. The target member can be rotatably supported in a state where the side end surface of the target member is exposed, that is, in a state where light can be incident from the side end surface of the target member. Therefore, by rotating the target member, the player can visually recognize the pattern or pattern displayed by the light emitted from the front surface of the target member in a displaced (rotated) state.

  In this case, the outer edge member can be used for both the role of condensing the light emitted from the light irradiation means on the side end surface of the target member and the role of rotatably supporting the target member together with the support wheel. Therefore, the number of parts can be reduced to reduce the product cost and improve the reliability due to the simplification of the structure.

  The support wheel may be rotatably supported, or may be fixed so as not to rotate. In this case, as a form in which the support wheel is guided along the guide groove, a form in which the support wheel rotatably supported rolls along the guide groove or rolls while sliding, or cannot rotate. A configuration in which the fixed support wheel slides along the guide groove is exemplified.

  In the gaming machine G5 or G6, the outer edge member has a guide groove recessed along the circumferential direction of either the annular outer circumferential surface or the inner circumferential surface, and the annular outer circumferential surface or inner circumferential surface. A gaming machine G7, wherein a curved rack gear is engraved on either one of the surfaces, and the rotation mechanism includes a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide groove.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G5 or G6, the outer edge member has a guide groove recessed along the circumferential direction of either the annular outer peripheral surface or the inner peripheral surface. In addition, a curved rack gear is engraved on the other one of the annular outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface, and the rotation mechanism includes a plurality of support wheels guided along the guide groove, so that the rigidity of the outer edge member is small. It can suppress becoming too much. That is, since the curved rack gear engraved on the outer edge member and the guide groove recessed in the emission increasing means are formed on the opposing surfaces, it is possible to suppress the formation of a part with low synthesis. As a result, the rigidity of the outer edge member can be ensured and the outer edge member can be prevented from being damaged.

  In gaming machines G1 to G7, a gaming machine G8 is characterized in that an intermediate plate is disposed between the plurality of target members facing each other, and the intermediate plate is disposed facing the light irradiation means.

  Here, when irradiating a plurality of target members with the light irradiated from one light irradiation unit, the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit is easily irradiated between the opposed members. When light is irradiated between the opposite faces of the target member, the display surface reflected on the target member and displayed on the target member and the brightness between the opposite faces of the target member approach the same brightness, so that the player It becomes difficult to make the display visible.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G1 to G7, an intermediate plate is disposed between the facing members, and the intermediate plate is disposed facing the light irradiation means. Since it is provided, it can suppress that the light of a light irradiation means injects directly between opposing object members. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the pattern or design displayed on the target member.

  In the gaming machine G8, the intermediate plate is provided with an inclined surface inclined in a direction toward the side end surface of the target member on a side surface facing the light irradiation means.

  According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G8, the intermediate plate is provided with an inclined surface that is inclined in a direction toward the side end surface of the target member on the side surface facing the light irradiation unit. It is possible to easily reflect the light applied to the plate toward the side end surfaces of the plurality of target members. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the pattern or design displayed on the target member.

  The gaming machines G1 to G9 include a moving mechanism that movably supports the plurality of target members and applies a driving force to the plurality of target members, and the plurality of target members are irradiated from the light irradiation unit. A non-incident surface that includes a light incident surface capable of entering light into the target member and a light non-incident surface that cannot emit light irradiated from the irradiating means. Is disposed at a position facing the light irradiating means, whereby the light applied to the target member is blocked.

  Here, if the light of one light irradiation means is incident on a plurality of target members, it is impossible to turn off only some of the target members among the plurality of target members. There is a problem of fewer.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G1 to G9, a plurality of target members are movably supported, and a plurality of moving mechanisms that apply driving force to the plurality of target members are provided. The target member includes an incident surface on which light irradiated from the light irradiating unit can be incident on the inside of the target member and a non-incident surface on which light irradiated from the light irradiating unit cannot be incident on the side of the side member. Since the non-incident surface is arranged at a position facing the light irradiating means, the light irradiated on the target member is blocked, so that the target member is displaced so that the non-incident surface of the target member becomes the light irradiating means. By disposing at the opposing positions, the light of the light irradiation means can be made non-incident into the target member. Thereby, it is possible to turn off only some of the plurality of target members. As a result, it is possible to ensure a variation of the effect by a plurality of target members.

  In the gaming machine G10, the target member is formed in a circular shape and is rotatably supported around the center thereof.

  According to the gaming machine G11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G10, the target member is formed in a circular shape and is supported rotatably about its center, so that the non-incident surface of the target member is irradiated with light. Place the target member's incident surface on the position facing the light irradiating means and display the target member's pattern or design from the state where the target member's pattern or design is hidden. Since the position of the outer edge of the target member is not changed in the case where the target member is displaced, it is difficult for the player to recognize the rotational drive of the target member. As a result, it is easy to give interest to the player by switching the display of patterns and symbols by the target member.

  The gaming machine G10 or G11 includes a plurality of the moving mechanisms, and the plurality of target members are displaced by different displacement amounts by the moving mechanisms.

  According to the gaming machine G12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G10 or G11, a plurality of movement mechanisms are provided, and the plurality of target members are displaced by different displacement amounts by the movement mechanism. It can be displaced in phase. Accordingly, it is possible to form a state in which a plurality of target members are turned on (on) and a state in which some or all of the plurality of target members are turned off (off). As a result, it is possible to ensure a variation of the effect by a plurality of target members.

  In any one of the gaming machines G10 to G12, the plurality of target members are connected to the different moving mechanisms, respectively.

  According to the gaming machine G13, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G10 to G12, the plurality of target members are connected to different moving mechanisms, and therefore the plurality of target members can be displaced independently of each other. it can. As a result, each of the plurality of target members can be displaced by the shortest distance to the phase for displaying each of the plurality of target members, and an effect by the plurality of target members can be quickly performed.

  In any one of the gaming machines G10 to G13, the non-incident surface area is set to be larger than a projected area of light irradiated on the target member from the light irradiation means.

  According to the gaming machine G14, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G10 to G13, the non-incident surface area is set larger than the projected area of the light irradiated from the light irradiation means to the target member. When the target member is turned off (off), it is possible to suppress the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit from being applied to the incident surface of the target member. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the target member in the off state.

  In any one of the gaming machines G10 to G14, the non-incident surface is formed with a shielding portion protruding toward the light irradiation means at a portion continuous with the incident surface.

  According to the gaming machine G15, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G10 to G14, the non-incident surface is formed with a shielding portion that protrudes toward the light irradiating means at a portion continuous with the incident surface. When the light is turned off, the light irradiating means can block the light incident on the incident surface of the target member by the shielding part. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the target member in the off state.

  In addition, as a shape of a shielding part, even if it forms as a protrusion which protrudes partially, it may bulge and form in a semicircular arc shape. The shape of the shielding portion may be a shape that blocks the light that is irradiated from the light irradiating means arranged to face the non-incident surface and proceeds to the incident surface.

  In any one of the gaming machines G10 to G15, the target member is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the light irradiation means is continuously provided around the target member with a locus having a radius smaller than the radius of the target member. A gaming machine G16 that is arranged.

  According to the gaming machine G16, in addition to the effects exhibited by any of the gaming machines G10 to G15, the target member is formed in a circular shape in front view, and the light irradiation means is smaller than the radius of the target member around the target member Since it arrange | positions continuously by the locus | trajectory of a radius, when turning off an object member, it can suppress that the light irradiated from a light irradiation means is irradiated to the entrance plane of an object member. That is, it is possible to easily irradiate the non-incident surface of the target member with the light emitted from both ends in the circumferential direction of the light irradiation means. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the target member in the off state.

  A gaming machine K1 in which the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C8, D1 to D6, E1 to E8, F1 to F13, and G1 to G16. . Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C8, D1 to D6, E1 to E8, F1 to F13, and G1 to G16, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine K2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B9, C1 to C8, D1 to D6, E1 to E8, F1 to F13, and G1 to G16, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine A gaming machine K3 characterized by being. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
410 Base member 420L Left displacement member (displacement member)
420R Right displacement member (displacement member)
422 connecting hole (first part or second part)
423 sliding groove (first part or second part, guide groove)
440 Cart member (first member or second member)
481 First drive motor (first drive means or second drive means)
485 Projection member (displacement member, second displacement member)
488L Lower left rack (first member or second member)
488R Lower right rack (first member or second member)
488b Drive pin (connecting pin)
491 Second drive motor (first drive means or second drive means)
610, 5610, 6610 Base members 611, 5611, rear base (base member)
612, 5612, 6612 Front base (base member)
612g Holding pin (protrusion)
6612p Opening 6612r Shielding member 620, 2620, 3620, 5620, 6620, 7620, 10620A, 10620B, 11620 Projection plate member (target member, light transmission member, divided body)
622, 6622 Reflector 630, 3630 Gear member (outer edge member, emission increasing means)
631 Tooth (curved rack gear)
640, 2640, 3640 Groove forming member (outer edge member, emission increasing means)
641,2641 Guide groove 651 LED (light emitting means, light irradiation means)
652 Substrate member 653 First block (block body)
653b1 insertion hole (fitting hole)
654 2nd block (block body)
654b1 insertion hole (fitting hole)
661 Drive motor (drive means, moving mechanism, rotating mechanism)
820 Front base (part of base member)
830 Back base (part of base member)
850 Displacement member 863 Transmission gear (rotating member)
863c Projecting portion 870 Connecting member 880 Drive motor (drive means)
10610A, 10610B Base member (non-permeable member)
10615A Reflective member 10622a First reflective portion 10622b Second reflective portion 11613 Intermediate base (intermediate plate)
11613b Inclined surface 11620a Incident surface 11620b Non-incident surface 11625 Outer edge member 11625a Ring rack (curved rack gear)
11625b Guide groove 10651a First LED (first light emitting member)
10651b 2nd LED (2nd light emission member)
SP Biasing spring (elastic member)
S1, S2 Screw C Color (support ring)
θ1 First drive range (outer range)
θ2 Second drive range (center range)
MO1, MO2, MO3, MO4 Drive motor (drive means)
GY5 gear (pinion gear)

Claims (3)

A light transmissive member formed of a light transmissive material and having a reflective portion;
A light emitting means disposed around the light transmitting member with an irradiation surface facing the reflecting portion;
A plurality of the reflecting portions are formed on one light transmitting member, and a plurality of the light emitting means are arranged in a state where an irradiation surface faces each of the reflecting portions, or a plurality of the light transmitting members are arranged in parallel. The light emitting means are arranged one or more at a time with the irradiation surface facing the side end surfaces of the plurality of light transmitting members,
In a gaming machine in which light incident from the periphery of the light transmitting member is reflected by the plurality of reflecting portions and emitted from the front surface of the light transmitting member,
A gaming machine comprising: a display distance changing means for changing a reflection position of light reflected by the plurality of reflecting portions in a front or back direction of the light transmitting member.   The light transmissive member includes a plurality of divided bodies arranged side by side in the front or back direction of the light transmissive member, and the plurality of reflecting portions are formed in at least one place on the one divided body, and the light emission 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the means are arranged one by one with the irradiation surface facing the side end surface of one of the divided bodies.   The plurality of reflecting portions are formed at least at three or more locations of the light transmitting member, and the reflection position of the light reflected by the plurality of reflecting portions is switched by switching between irradiation or non-irradiation of the plurality of light emitting means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is changed in a front or back direction of the light transmitting member.

Images